Revert:PR c++/50800
[official-gcc.git] / gcc / combine.c
blob6cd55dd4432791c5e039df1c6f08f6d7613e8d1c
1 /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
20 /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona
21 Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured
22 representation for RTL instead of their string representation.
24 The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment
25 to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns,
26 each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn
27 and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks.
28 They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis).
30 We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link.
31 We also try to combine triplets of insns A, B and C when C has
32 a link back to B and B has a link back to A. Likewise for a
33 small number of quadruplets of insns A, B, C and D for which
34 there's high likelihood of of success.
36 LOG_LINKS does not have links for use of the CC0. They don't
37 need to, because the insn that sets the CC0 is always immediately
38 before the insn that tests it. So we always regard a branch
39 insn as having a logical link to the preceding insn. The same is true
40 for an insn explicitly using CC0.
42 We check (with use_crosses_set_p) to avoid combining in such a way
43 as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different.
45 Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous
46 insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in
47 the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn
48 for our target machine, according to the machine description,
49 we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow
50 information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did.
52 There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information isn't
53 completely updated (however this is only a local issue since it is
54 regenerated before the next pass that uses it):
56 - reg_live_length is not updated
57 - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is
58 no longer required in a computation
59 - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_notes) when a
60 REG_DEAD note is lost
61 - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be
62 removed because there is no way to know which register it was
63 linking
65 To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s)
66 consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward,
67 we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle.
69 Since we do not represent assignments to CC0 explicitly except when that
70 is all an insn does, there is no LOG_LINKS entry in an insn that uses
71 the condition code for the insn that set the condition code.
72 Fortunately, these two insns must be consecutive.
73 Therefore, every JUMP_INSN is taken to have an implicit logical link
74 to the preceding insn. This is not quite right, since non-jumps can
75 also use the condition code; but in practice such insns would not
76 combine anyway. */
78 #include "config.h"
79 #include "system.h"
80 #include "coretypes.h"
81 #include "tm.h"
82 #include "rtl.h"
83 #include "hash-set.h"
84 #include "machmode.h"
85 #include "vec.h"
86 #include "double-int.h"
87 #include "input.h"
88 #include "alias.h"
89 #include "symtab.h"
90 #include "wide-int.h"
91 #include "inchash.h"
92 #include "tree.h"
93 #include "stor-layout.h"
94 #include "tm_p.h"
95 #include "flags.h"
96 #include "regs.h"
97 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
98 #include "predict.h"
99 #include "function.h"
100 #include "dominance.h"
101 #include "cfg.h"
102 #include "cfgrtl.h"
103 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
104 #include "basic-block.h"
105 #include "insn-config.h"
106 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
107 #include "hashtab.h"
108 #include "statistics.h"
109 #include "real.h"
110 #include "fixed-value.h"
111 #include "expmed.h"
112 #include "dojump.h"
113 #include "explow.h"
114 #include "calls.h"
115 #include "emit-rtl.h"
116 #include "varasm.h"
117 #include "stmt.h"
118 #include "expr.h"
119 #include "insn-attr.h"
120 #include "recog.h"
121 #include "diagnostic-core.h"
122 #include "target.h"
123 #include "insn-codes.h"
124 #include "optabs.h"
125 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
126 #include "params.h"
127 #include "tree-pass.h"
128 #include "df.h"
129 #include "valtrack.h"
130 #include "hash-map.h"
131 #include "is-a.h"
132 #include "plugin-api.h"
133 #include "ipa-ref.h"
134 #include "cgraph.h"
135 #include "obstack.h"
136 #include "rtl-iter.h"
138 /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */
140 static int combine_attempts;
142 /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */
144 static int combine_merges;
146 /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */
148 static int combine_extras;
150 /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */
152 static int combine_successes;
154 /* Totals over entire compilation. */
156 static int total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes;
158 /* combine_instructions may try to replace the right hand side of the
159 second instruction with the value of an associated REG_EQUAL note
160 before throwing it at try_combine. That is problematic when there
161 is a REG_DEAD note for a register used in the old right hand side
162 and can cause distribute_notes to do wrong things. This is the
163 second instruction if it has been so modified, null otherwise. */
165 static rtx_insn *i2mod;
167 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the old right hand side. */
169 static rtx i2mod_old_rhs;
171 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the new right hand side. */
173 static rtx i2mod_new_rhs;
175 typedef struct reg_stat_struct {
176 /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
177 rtx_insn *last_death;
179 /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
180 rtx_insn *last_set;
182 /* The next group of fields allows the recording of the last value assigned
183 to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if an
184 operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed
185 on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if
186 all the zero bits are already known to be turned off.
188 We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the
189 following ways:
191 (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label.
192 (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned
193 to a register. Often just its form is helpful.
195 Therefore, we maintain the following fields:
197 last_set_value the last value assigned
198 last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the
199 register was assigned
200 last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a
201 value using the register is assigned
202 last_set_invalid set to nonzero when it is not valid
203 to use the value of this register in some
204 register's value
206 To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand
207 the distinction between the value in last_set_value being valid and
208 the register being validly contained in some other expression in the
209 table.
211 (The next two parameters are out of date).
213 reg_stat[i].last_set_value is valid if it is nonzero, and either
214 reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_stat[i].last_set_label == label_tick.
216 Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value
217 of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the
218 value for register J if reg_stat[j].last_set_invalid is zero, or
219 reg_stat[i].last_set_label < reg_stat[j].last_set_label.
221 If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may
222 not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by
223 something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). */
225 /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */
227 rtx last_set_value;
229 /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n
230 is placed in last_set_value. */
232 int last_set_table_tick;
234 /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in
235 last_set_value. */
237 int last_set_label;
239 /* These fields are maintained in parallel with last_set_value and are
240 used to store the mode in which the register was last set, the bits
241 that were known to be zero when it was last set, and the number of
242 sign bits copies it was known to have when it was last set. */
244 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT last_set_nonzero_bits;
245 char last_set_sign_bit_copies;
246 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) last_set_mode : 8;
248 /* Set nonzero if references to register n in expressions should not be
249 used. last_set_invalid is set nonzero when this register is being
250 assigned to and last_set_table_tick == label_tick. */
252 char last_set_invalid;
254 /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one
255 basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example,
256 a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine
257 where byte loads zero extend.
259 We record in the following fields if a register has some leading bits
260 that are always equal to the sign bit, and what we know about the
261 nonzero bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be
262 zero.
264 If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */
266 unsigned char sign_bit_copies;
268 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits;
270 /* Record the value of the label_tick when the last truncation
271 happened. The field truncated_to_mode is only valid if
272 truncation_label == label_tick. */
274 int truncation_label;
276 /* Record the last truncation seen for this register. If truncation
277 is not a nop to this mode we might be able to save an explicit
278 truncation if we know that value already contains a truncated
279 value. */
281 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) truncated_to_mode : 8;
282 } reg_stat_type;
285 static vec<reg_stat_type> reg_stat;
287 /* One plus the highest pseudo for which we track REG_N_SETS.
288 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs allocates the array for REG_N_SETS just once,
289 but during combine_split_insns new pseudos can be created. As we don't have
290 updated DF information in that case, it is hard to initialize the array
291 after growing. The combiner only cares about REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1,
292 so instead of growing the arrays, just assume all newly created pseudos
293 during combine might be set multiple times. */
295 static unsigned int reg_n_sets_max;
297 /* Record the luid of the last insn that invalidated memory
298 (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */
300 static int mem_last_set;
302 /* Record the luid of the last CALL_INSN
303 so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */
305 static int last_call_luid;
307 /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified
308 (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn
309 is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be
310 looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn
311 to judge whether a simplification is valid. */
313 static rtx_insn *subst_insn;
315 /* This is the lowest LUID that `subst' is currently dealing with.
316 get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or
317 after this LUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if
318 I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register
319 to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the
320 new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */
322 static int subst_low_luid;
324 /* This contains any hard registers that are used in newpat; reg_dead_at_p
325 must consider all these registers to be always live. */
327 static HARD_REG_SET newpat_used_regs;
329 /* This is an insn to which a LOG_LINKS entry has been added. If this
330 insn is the earlier than I2 or I3, combine should rescan starting at
331 that location. */
333 static rtx_insn *added_links_insn;
335 /* Basic block in which we are performing combines. */
336 static basic_block this_basic_block;
337 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
340 /* Length of the currently allocated uid_insn_cost array. */
342 static int max_uid_known;
344 /* The following array records the insn_rtx_cost for every insn
345 in the instruction stream. */
347 static int *uid_insn_cost;
349 /* The following array records the LOG_LINKS for every insn in the
350 instruction stream as struct insn_link pointers. */
352 struct insn_link {
353 rtx_insn *insn;
354 unsigned int regno;
355 struct insn_link *next;
358 static struct insn_link **uid_log_links;
360 #define INSN_COST(INSN) (uid_insn_cost[INSN_UID (INSN)])
361 #define LOG_LINKS(INSN) (uid_log_links[INSN_UID (INSN)])
363 #define FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK(L, INSN) \
364 for ((L) = LOG_LINKS (INSN); (L); (L) = (L)->next)
366 /* Links for LOG_LINKS are allocated from this obstack. */
368 static struct obstack insn_link_obstack;
370 /* Allocate a link. */
372 static inline struct insn_link *
373 alloc_insn_link (rtx_insn *insn, unsigned int regno, struct insn_link *next)
375 struct insn_link *l
376 = (struct insn_link *) obstack_alloc (&insn_link_obstack,
377 sizeof (struct insn_link));
378 l->insn = insn;
379 l->regno = regno;
380 l->next = next;
381 return l;
384 /* Incremented for each basic block. */
386 static int label_tick;
388 /* Reset to label_tick for each extended basic block in scanning order. */
390 static int label_tick_ebb_start;
392 /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits. It is the
393 largest integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
395 static machine_mode nonzero_bits_mode;
397 /* Nonzero when reg_stat[].nonzero_bits and reg_stat[].sign_bit_copies can
398 be safely used. It is zero while computing them and after combine has
399 completed. This former test prevents propagating values based on
400 previously set values, which can be incorrect if a variable is modified
401 in a loop. */
403 static int nonzero_sign_valid;
406 /* Record one modification to rtl structure
407 to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. */
409 enum undo_kind { UNDO_RTX, UNDO_INT, UNDO_MODE, UNDO_LINKS };
411 struct undo
413 struct undo *next;
414 enum undo_kind kind;
415 union { rtx r; int i; machine_mode m; struct insn_link *l; } old_contents;
416 union { rtx *r; int *i; struct insn_link **l; } where;
419 /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them.
420 num_undo says how many are currently recorded.
422 other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process
423 of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */
425 struct undobuf
427 struct undo *undos;
428 struct undo *frees;
429 rtx_insn *other_insn;
432 static struct undobuf undobuf;
434 /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for
435 was found and replaced. */
437 static int n_occurrences;
439 static rtx reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
440 machine_mode,
441 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
442 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
443 static rtx reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
444 machine_mode,
445 unsigned int, unsigned int *);
446 static void do_SUBST (rtx *, rtx);
447 static void do_SUBST_INT (int *, int);
448 static void init_reg_last (void);
449 static void setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *);
450 static void set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
451 static int cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *);
452 static int can_combine_p (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
453 rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx *);
454 static int combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, rtx *);
455 static int contains_muldiv (rtx);
456 static rtx_insn *try_combine (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
457 int *, rtx_insn *);
458 static void undo_all (void);
459 static void undo_commit (void);
460 static rtx *find_split_point (rtx *, rtx_insn *, bool);
461 static rtx subst (rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, int);
462 static rtx combine_simplify_rtx (rtx, machine_mode, int, int);
463 static rtx simplify_if_then_else (rtx);
464 static rtx simplify_set (rtx);
465 static rtx simplify_logical (rtx);
466 static rtx expand_compound_operation (rtx);
467 static const_rtx expand_field_assignment (const_rtx);
468 static rtx make_extraction (machine_mode, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
469 rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int, int, int);
470 static rtx extract_left_shift (rtx, int);
471 static int get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
472 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
473 static rtx canon_reg_for_combine (rtx, rtx);
474 static rtx force_to_mode (rtx, machine_mode,
475 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
476 static rtx if_then_else_cond (rtx, rtx *, rtx *);
477 static rtx known_cond (rtx, enum rtx_code, rtx, rtx);
478 static int rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx, rtx, bool = false);
479 static rtx make_field_assignment (rtx);
480 static rtx apply_distributive_law (rtx);
481 static rtx distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx, int);
482 static rtx simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode, rtx,
483 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
484 static rtx simplify_and_const_int (rtx, machine_mode, rtx,
485 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
486 static int merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *, HOST_WIDE_INT *, enum rtx_code,
487 HOST_WIDE_INT, machine_mode, int *);
488 static rtx simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, int);
489 static rtx simplify_shift_const (rtx, enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx,
490 int);
491 static int recog_for_combine (rtx *, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
492 static rtx gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode, rtx);
493 static enum rtx_code simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code, machine_mode,
494 rtx, rtx *);
495 static enum rtx_code simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *);
496 static void update_table_tick (rtx);
497 static void record_value_for_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx);
498 static void check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *, rtx);
499 static void record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
500 static void record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *);
501 static int get_last_value_validate (rtx *, rtx_insn *, int, int);
502 static rtx get_last_value (const_rtx);
503 static int use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx, int);
504 static void reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
505 static int reg_dead_at_p (rtx, rtx_insn *);
506 static void move_deaths (rtx, rtx, int, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
507 static int reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx, rtx);
508 static void distribute_notes (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx, rtx, rtx);
509 static void distribute_links (struct insn_link *);
510 static void mark_used_regs_combine (rtx);
511 static void record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *, rtx);
512 static bool unmentioned_reg_p (rtx, rtx);
513 static void record_truncated_values (rtx *, void *);
514 static bool reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode, const_rtx);
515 static rtx gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode, rtx);
518 /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine.
519 See comments in gen_lowpart_for_combine. */
520 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
521 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_for_combine
523 /* Our implementation of gen_lowpart never emits a new pseudo. */
524 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT
525 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT gen_lowpart_for_combine
527 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS
528 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine
530 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES
531 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine
533 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE
534 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE reg_truncated_to_mode
536 static const struct rtl_hooks combine_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
539 /* Convenience wrapper for the canonicalize_comparison target hook.
540 Target hooks cannot use enum rtx_code. */
541 static inline void
542 target_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code *code, rtx *op0, rtx *op1,
543 bool op0_preserve_value)
545 int code_int = (int)*code;
546 targetm.canonicalize_comparison (&code_int, op0, op1, op0_preserve_value);
547 *code = (enum rtx_code)code_int;
550 /* Try to split PATTERN found in INSN. This returns NULL_RTX if
551 PATTERN can not be split. Otherwise, it returns an insn sequence.
552 This is a wrapper around split_insns which ensures that the
553 reg_stat vector is made larger if the splitter creates a new
554 register. */
556 static rtx_insn *
557 combine_split_insns (rtx pattern, rtx insn)
559 rtx_insn *ret;
560 unsigned int nregs;
562 ret = safe_as_a <rtx_insn *> (split_insns (pattern, insn));
563 nregs = max_reg_num ();
564 if (nregs > reg_stat.length ())
565 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
566 return ret;
569 /* This is used by find_single_use to locate an rtx in LOC that
570 contains exactly one use of DEST, which is typically either a REG
571 or CC0. It returns a pointer to the innermost rtx expression
572 containing DEST. Appearances of DEST that are being used to
573 totally replace it are not counted. */
575 static rtx *
576 find_single_use_1 (rtx dest, rtx *loc)
578 rtx x = *loc;
579 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
580 rtx *result = NULL;
581 rtx *this_result;
582 int i;
583 const char *fmt;
585 switch (code)
587 case CONST:
588 case LABEL_REF:
589 case SYMBOL_REF:
590 CASE_CONST_ANY:
591 case CLOBBER:
592 return 0;
594 case SET:
595 /* If the destination is anything other than CC0, PC, a REG or a SUBREG
596 of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn uses DEST if
597 it is mentioned in the destination or the source. Otherwise, we
598 need just check the source. */
599 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
600 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC
601 && !REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
602 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
603 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)))
604 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
605 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
606 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
607 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
608 break;
610 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &SET_SRC (x));
612 case MEM:
613 case SUBREG:
614 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, 0));
616 default:
617 break;
620 /* If it wasn't one of the common cases above, check each expression and
621 vector of this code. Look for a unique usage of DEST. */
623 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
624 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
626 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
628 if (dest == XEXP (x, i)
629 || (REG_P (dest) && REG_P (XEXP (x, i))
630 && REGNO (dest) == REGNO (XEXP (x, i))))
631 this_result = loc;
632 else
633 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, i));
635 if (result == NULL)
636 result = this_result;
637 else if (this_result)
638 /* Duplicate usage. */
639 return NULL;
641 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
643 int j;
645 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
647 if (XVECEXP (x, i, j) == dest
648 || (REG_P (dest)
649 && REG_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j))
650 && REGNO (XVECEXP (x, i, j)) == REGNO (dest)))
651 this_result = loc;
652 else
653 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XVECEXP (x, i, j));
655 if (result == NULL)
656 result = this_result;
657 else if (this_result)
658 return NULL;
663 return result;
667 /* See if DEST, produced in INSN, is used only a single time in the
668 sequel. If so, return a pointer to the innermost rtx expression in which
669 it is used.
671 If PLOC is nonzero, *PLOC is set to the insn containing the single use.
673 If DEST is cc0_rtx, we look only at the next insn. In that case, we don't
674 care about REG_DEAD notes or LOG_LINKS.
676 Otherwise, we find the single use by finding an insn that has a
677 LOG_LINKS pointing at INSN and has a REG_DEAD note for DEST. If DEST is
678 only referenced once in that insn, we know that it must be the first
679 and last insn referencing DEST. */
681 static rtx *
682 find_single_use (rtx dest, rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn **ploc)
684 basic_block bb;
685 rtx_insn *next;
686 rtx *result;
687 struct insn_link *link;
689 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
691 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
692 if (next == 0
693 || (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (next) && !JUMP_P (next)))
694 return 0;
696 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
697 if (result && ploc)
698 *ploc = next;
699 return result;
702 if (!REG_P (dest))
703 return 0;
705 bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
706 for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
707 next && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (next) == bb;
708 next = NEXT_INSN (next))
709 if (INSN_P (next) && dead_or_set_p (next, dest))
711 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, next)
712 if (link->insn == insn && link->regno == REGNO (dest))
713 break;
715 if (link)
717 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
718 if (ploc)
719 *ploc = next;
720 return result;
724 return 0;
727 /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some
728 insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already
729 set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might
730 also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into
731 the undo table. */
733 static void
734 do_SUBST (rtx *into, rtx newval)
736 struct undo *buf;
737 rtx oldval = *into;
739 if (oldval == newval)
740 return;
742 /* We'd like to catch as many invalid transformations here as
743 possible. Unfortunately, there are way too many mode changes
744 that are perfectly valid, so we'd waste too much effort for
745 little gain doing the checks here. Focus on catching invalid
746 transformations involving integer constants. */
747 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (oldval)) == MODE_INT
748 && CONST_INT_P (newval))
750 /* Sanity check that we're replacing oldval with a CONST_INT
751 that is a valid sign-extension for the original mode. */
752 gcc_assert (INTVAL (newval)
753 == trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (newval), GET_MODE (oldval)));
755 /* Replacing the operand of a SUBREG or a ZERO_EXTEND with a
756 CONST_INT is not valid, because after the replacement, the
757 original mode would be gone. Unfortunately, we can't tell
758 when do_SUBST is called to replace the operand thereof, so we
759 perform this test on oldval instead, checking whether an
760 invalid replacement took place before we got here. */
761 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == SUBREG
762 && CONST_INT_P (SUBREG_REG (oldval))));
763 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == ZERO_EXTEND
764 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (oldval, 0))));
767 if (undobuf.frees)
768 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
769 else
770 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
772 buf->kind = UNDO_RTX;
773 buf->where.r = into;
774 buf->old_contents.r = oldval;
775 *into = newval;
777 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
780 #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
782 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int expression. Note that substitution
783 for the value of a HOST_WIDE_INT value (including CONST_INT) is
784 not safe. */
786 static void
787 do_SUBST_INT (int *into, int newval)
789 struct undo *buf;
790 int oldval = *into;
792 if (oldval == newval)
793 return;
795 if (undobuf.frees)
796 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
797 else
798 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
800 buf->kind = UNDO_INT;
801 buf->where.i = into;
802 buf->old_contents.i = oldval;
803 *into = newval;
805 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
808 #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_INT (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
810 /* Similar to SUBST, but just substitute the mode. This is used when
811 changing the mode of a pseudo-register, so that any other
812 references to the entry in the regno_reg_rtx array will change as
813 well. */
815 static void
816 do_SUBST_MODE (rtx *into, machine_mode newval)
818 struct undo *buf;
819 machine_mode oldval = GET_MODE (*into);
821 if (oldval == newval)
822 return;
824 if (undobuf.frees)
825 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
826 else
827 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
829 buf->kind = UNDO_MODE;
830 buf->where.r = into;
831 buf->old_contents.m = oldval;
832 adjust_reg_mode (*into, newval);
834 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
837 #define SUBST_MODE(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_MODE (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
839 #if !HAVE_cc0
840 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is a LOG_LINKS expression. */
842 static void
843 do_SUBST_LINK (struct insn_link **into, struct insn_link *newval)
845 struct undo *buf;
846 struct insn_link * oldval = *into;
848 if (oldval == newval)
849 return;
851 if (undobuf.frees)
852 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
853 else
854 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
856 buf->kind = UNDO_LINKS;
857 buf->where.l = into;
858 buf->old_contents.l = oldval;
859 *into = newval;
861 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
864 #define SUBST_LINK(oldval, newval) do_SUBST_LINK (&oldval, newval)
865 #endif
867 /* Subroutine of try_combine. Determine whether the replacement patterns
868 NEWPAT, NEWI2PAT and NEWOTHERPAT are cheaper according to insn_rtx_cost
869 than the original sequence I0, I1, I2, I3 and undobuf.other_insn. Note
870 that I0, I1 and/or NEWI2PAT may be NULL_RTX. Similarly, NEWOTHERPAT and
871 undobuf.other_insn may also both be NULL_RTX. Return false if the cost
872 of all the instructions can be estimated and the replacements are more
873 expensive than the original sequence. */
875 static bool
876 combine_validate_cost (rtx_insn *i0, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i3,
877 rtx newpat, rtx newi2pat, rtx newotherpat)
879 int i0_cost, i1_cost, i2_cost, i3_cost;
880 int new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost;
881 int old_cost, new_cost;
883 /* Lookup the original insn_rtx_costs. */
884 i2_cost = INSN_COST (i2);
885 i3_cost = INSN_COST (i3);
887 if (i1)
889 i1_cost = INSN_COST (i1);
890 if (i0)
892 i0_cost = INSN_COST (i0);
893 old_cost = (i0_cost > 0 && i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
894 ? i0_cost + i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
896 else
898 old_cost = (i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
899 ? i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
900 i0_cost = 0;
903 else
905 old_cost = (i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0) ? i2_cost + i3_cost : 0;
906 i1_cost = i0_cost = 0;
909 /* If we have split a PARALLEL I2 to I1,I2, we have counted its cost twice;
910 correct that. */
911 if (old_cost && i1 && INSN_UID (i1) == INSN_UID (i2))
912 old_cost -= i1_cost;
915 /* Calculate the replacement insn_rtx_costs. */
916 new_i3_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
917 if (newi2pat)
919 new_i2_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newi2pat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
920 new_cost = (new_i2_cost > 0 && new_i3_cost > 0)
921 ? new_i2_cost + new_i3_cost : 0;
923 else
925 new_cost = new_i3_cost;
926 new_i2_cost = 0;
929 if (undobuf.other_insn)
931 int old_other_cost, new_other_cost;
933 old_other_cost = INSN_COST (undobuf.other_insn);
934 new_other_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newotherpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
935 if (old_other_cost > 0 && new_other_cost > 0)
937 old_cost += old_other_cost;
938 new_cost += new_other_cost;
940 else
941 old_cost = 0;
944 /* Disallow this combination if both new_cost and old_cost are greater than
945 zero, and new_cost is greater than old cost. */
946 int reject = old_cost > 0 && new_cost > old_cost;
948 if (dump_file)
950 fprintf (dump_file, "%s combination of insns ",
951 reject ? "rejecting" : "allowing");
952 if (i0)
953 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i0));
954 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
955 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i1));
956 fprintf (dump_file, "%d and %d\n", INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
958 fprintf (dump_file, "original costs ");
959 if (i0)
960 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i0_cost);
961 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
962 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i1_cost);
963 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + %d = %d\n", i2_cost, i3_cost, old_cost);
965 if (newi2pat)
966 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement costs %d + %d = %d\n",
967 new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost, new_cost);
968 else
969 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement cost %d\n", new_cost);
972 if (reject)
973 return false;
975 /* Update the uid_insn_cost array with the replacement costs. */
976 INSN_COST (i2) = new_i2_cost;
977 INSN_COST (i3) = new_i3_cost;
978 if (i1)
980 INSN_COST (i1) = 0;
981 if (i0)
982 INSN_COST (i0) = 0;
985 return true;
989 /* Delete any insns that copy a register to itself. */
991 static void
992 delete_noop_moves (void)
994 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
995 basic_block bb;
997 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
999 for (insn = BB_HEAD (bb); insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (bb)); insn = next)
1001 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
1002 if (INSN_P (insn) && noop_move_p (insn))
1004 if (dump_file)
1005 fprintf (dump_file, "deleting noop move %d\n", INSN_UID (insn));
1007 delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
1014 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine DEF. */
1015 static bool
1016 can_combine_def_p (df_ref def)
1018 /* Do not consider if it is pre/post modification in MEM. */
1019 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_PRE_POST_MODIFY)
1020 return false;
1022 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
1024 /* Do not combine frame pointer adjustments. */
1025 if ((regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1026 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
1027 #if !HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
1028 || (regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1029 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
1030 #endif
1031 #if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1032 || (regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno])
1033 #endif
1035 return false;
1037 return true;
1040 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine USE. */
1041 static bool
1042 can_combine_use_p (df_ref use)
1044 /* Do not consider the usage of the stack pointer by function call. */
1045 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (use) & DF_REF_CALL_STACK_USAGE)
1046 return false;
1048 return true;
1051 /* Fill in log links field for all insns. */
1053 static void
1054 create_log_links (void)
1056 basic_block bb;
1057 rtx_insn **next_use;
1058 rtx_insn *insn;
1059 df_ref def, use;
1061 next_use = XCNEWVEC (rtx_insn *, max_reg_num ());
1063 /* Pass through each block from the end, recording the uses of each
1064 register and establishing log links when def is encountered.
1065 Note that we do not clear next_use array in order to save time,
1066 so we have to test whether the use is in the same basic block as def.
1068 There are a few cases below when we do not consider the definition or
1069 usage -- these are taken from original flow.c did. Don't ask me why it is
1070 done this way; I don't know and if it works, I don't want to know. */
1072 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
1074 FOR_BB_INSNS_REVERSE (bb, insn)
1076 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1077 continue;
1079 /* Log links are created only once. */
1080 gcc_assert (!LOG_LINKS (insn));
1082 FOR_EACH_INSN_DEF (def, insn)
1084 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
1085 rtx_insn *use_insn;
1087 if (!next_use[regno])
1088 continue;
1090 if (!can_combine_def_p (def))
1091 continue;
1093 use_insn = next_use[regno];
1094 next_use[regno] = NULL;
1096 if (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (use_insn) != bb)
1097 continue;
1099 /* flow.c claimed:
1101 We don't build a LOG_LINK for hard registers contained
1102 in ASM_OPERANDs. If these registers get replaced,
1103 we might wind up changing the semantics of the insn,
1104 even if reload can make what appear to be valid
1105 assignments later. */
1106 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1107 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (use_insn)) >= 0)
1108 continue;
1110 /* Don't add duplicate links between instructions. */
1111 struct insn_link *links;
1112 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, use_insn)
1113 if (insn == links->insn && regno == links->regno)
1114 break;
1116 if (!links)
1117 LOG_LINKS (use_insn)
1118 = alloc_insn_link (insn, regno, LOG_LINKS (use_insn));
1121 FOR_EACH_INSN_USE (use, insn)
1122 if (can_combine_use_p (use))
1123 next_use[DF_REF_REGNO (use)] = insn;
1127 free (next_use);
1130 /* Walk the LOG_LINKS of insn B to see if we find a reference to A. Return
1131 true if we found a LOG_LINK that proves that A feeds B. This only works
1132 if there are no instructions between A and B which could have a link
1133 depending on A, since in that case we would not record a link for B.
1134 We also check the implicit dependency created by a cc0 setter/user
1135 pair. */
1137 static bool
1138 insn_a_feeds_b (rtx_insn *a, rtx_insn *b)
1140 struct insn_link *links;
1141 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, b)
1142 if (links->insn == a)
1143 return true;
1144 if (HAVE_cc0 && sets_cc0_p (a))
1145 return true;
1146 return false;
1149 /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function.
1150 NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number.
1152 Return nonzero if the combiner has turned an indirect jump
1153 instruction into a direct jump. */
1154 static int
1155 combine_instructions (rtx_insn *f, unsigned int nregs)
1157 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
1158 #if HAVE_cc0
1159 rtx_insn *prev;
1160 #endif
1161 struct insn_link *links, *nextlinks;
1162 rtx_insn *first;
1163 basic_block last_bb;
1165 int new_direct_jump_p = 0;
1167 for (first = f; first && !INSN_P (first); )
1168 first = NEXT_INSN (first);
1169 if (!first)
1170 return 0;
1172 combine_attempts = 0;
1173 combine_merges = 0;
1174 combine_extras = 0;
1175 combine_successes = 0;
1177 rtl_hooks = combine_rtl_hooks;
1179 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
1181 init_recog_no_volatile ();
1183 /* Allocate array for insn info. */
1184 max_uid_known = get_max_uid ();
1185 uid_log_links = XCNEWVEC (struct insn_link *, max_uid_known + 1);
1186 uid_insn_cost = XCNEWVEC (int, max_uid_known + 1);
1187 gcc_obstack_init (&insn_link_obstack);
1189 nonzero_bits_mode = mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, MODE_INT, 0);
1191 /* Don't use reg_stat[].nonzero_bits when computing it. This can cause
1192 problems when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */
1194 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1195 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1197 /* Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what
1198 bits are known to be zero for some registers and how many copies
1199 of the sign bit are known to exist for those registers.
1201 Also set any known values so that we can use it while searching
1202 for what bits are known to be set. */
1204 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1205 /* Allow the entry block and the first block to fall into the same EBB.
1206 Conceptually the incoming promotions are assigned to the entry block. */
1207 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1209 create_log_links ();
1210 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1212 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1213 last_call_luid = 0;
1214 mem_last_set = -1;
1216 label_tick++;
1217 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1218 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1219 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1220 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1222 FOR_BB_INSNS (this_basic_block, insn)
1223 if (INSN_P (insn) && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn))
1225 #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
1226 rtx links;
1227 #endif
1229 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1230 subst_insn = insn;
1232 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies,
1233 insn);
1234 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1236 #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
1237 for (links = REG_NOTES (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1))
1238 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (links) == REG_INC)
1239 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (XEXP (links, 0), NULL_RTX,
1240 insn);
1241 #endif
1243 /* Record the current insn_rtx_cost of this instruction. */
1244 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn))
1245 INSN_COST (insn) = insn_rtx_cost (PATTERN (insn),
1246 optimize_this_for_speed_p);
1247 if (dump_file)
1248 fprintf (dump_file, "insn_cost %d: %d\n",
1249 INSN_UID (insn), INSN_COST (insn));
1253 nonzero_sign_valid = 1;
1255 /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */
1256 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1257 init_reg_last ();
1258 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1259 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1260 int max_combine = PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_COMBINE_INSNS);
1262 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1264 rtx_insn *last_combined_insn = NULL;
1265 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1266 last_call_luid = 0;
1267 mem_last_set = -1;
1269 label_tick++;
1270 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1271 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1272 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1273 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1275 rtl_profile_for_bb (this_basic_block);
1276 for (insn = BB_HEAD (this_basic_block);
1277 insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (this_basic_block));
1278 insn = next ? next : NEXT_INSN (insn))
1280 next = 0;
1281 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1282 continue;
1284 while (last_combined_insn
1285 && last_combined_insn->deleted ())
1286 last_combined_insn = PREV_INSN (last_combined_insn);
1287 if (last_combined_insn == NULL_RTX
1288 || BARRIER_P (last_combined_insn)
1289 || BLOCK_FOR_INSN (last_combined_insn) != this_basic_block
1290 || DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn) <= DF_INSN_LUID (insn))
1291 last_combined_insn = insn;
1293 /* See if we know about function return values before this
1294 insn based upon SUBREG flags. */
1295 check_promoted_subreg (insn, PATTERN (insn));
1297 /* See if we can find hardregs and subreg of pseudos in
1298 narrower modes. This could help turning TRUNCATEs
1299 into SUBREGs. */
1300 note_uses (&PATTERN (insn), record_truncated_values, NULL);
1302 /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */
1304 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1305 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn, NULL,
1306 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1307 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1309 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "two-insn combine", 1);
1310 goto retry;
1313 /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */
1315 if (max_combine >= 3)
1316 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1318 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1320 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1321 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1322 if (NOTE_P (link))
1323 continue;
1325 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1326 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, nextlinks->insn,
1327 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1328 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1330 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1331 goto retry;
1335 #if HAVE_cc0
1336 /* Try to combine a jump insn that uses CC0
1337 with a preceding insn that sets CC0, and maybe with its
1338 logical predecessor as well.
1339 This is how we make decrement-and-branch insns.
1340 We need this special code because data flow connections
1341 via CC0 do not get entered in LOG_LINKS. */
1343 if (JUMP_P (insn)
1344 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1345 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1346 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev)))
1348 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1349 &new_direct_jump_p,
1350 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1351 goto retry;
1353 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1354 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1355 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1356 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1357 goto retry;
1360 /* Do the same for an insn that explicitly references CC0. */
1361 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn)
1362 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1363 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1364 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1365 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
1366 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
1368 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1369 &new_direct_jump_p,
1370 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1371 goto retry;
1373 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1374 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1375 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1376 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1377 goto retry;
1380 /* Finally, see if any of the insns that this insn links to
1381 explicitly references CC0. If so, try this insn, that insn,
1382 and its predecessor if it sets CC0. */
1383 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1384 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (links->insn)
1385 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (links->insn)) == SET
1386 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (links->insn)))
1387 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (links->insn)) != 0
1388 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1389 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1390 && (next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1391 prev, NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1392 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1393 goto retry;
1394 #endif
1396 /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it
1397 uses. */
1398 if (max_combine >= 3)
1399 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1400 for (nextlinks = links->next; nextlinks;
1401 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1402 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1403 nextlinks->insn, NULL,
1404 &new_direct_jump_p,
1405 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1408 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1409 goto retry;
1412 /* Try four-instruction combinations. */
1413 if (max_combine >= 4)
1414 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1416 struct insn_link *next1;
1417 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1419 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1420 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1421 if (NOTE_P (link))
1422 continue;
1424 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (next1, link)
1426 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1427 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1428 continue;
1429 /* I0 -> I1 -> I2 -> I3. */
1430 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1431 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1432 nextlinks->insn,
1433 &new_direct_jump_p,
1434 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1436 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1437 goto retry;
1439 /* I0, I1 -> I2, I2 -> I3. */
1440 for (nextlinks = next1->next; nextlinks;
1441 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1442 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1443 nextlinks->insn,
1444 &new_direct_jump_p,
1445 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1447 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1448 goto retry;
1452 for (next1 = links->next; next1; next1 = next1->next)
1454 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1455 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1456 continue;
1457 /* I0 -> I2; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1458 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1459 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1460 nextlinks->insn,
1461 &new_direct_jump_p,
1462 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1464 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1465 goto retry;
1467 /* I0 -> I1; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1468 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1469 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1470 nextlinks->insn,
1471 &new_direct_jump_p,
1472 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1474 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1475 goto retry;
1480 /* Try this insn with each REG_EQUAL note it links back to. */
1481 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1483 rtx set, note;
1484 rtx_insn *temp = links->insn;
1485 if ((set = single_set (temp)) != 0
1486 && (note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (temp)) != 0
1487 && (note = XEXP (note, 0), GET_CODE (note)) != EXPR_LIST
1488 /* Avoid using a register that may already been marked
1489 dead by an earlier instruction. */
1490 && ! unmentioned_reg_p (note, SET_SRC (set))
1491 && (GET_MODE (note) == VOIDmode
1492 ? SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)))
1493 : GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == GET_MODE (note)))
1495 /* Temporarily replace the set's source with the
1496 contents of the REG_EQUAL note. The insn will
1497 be deleted or recognized by try_combine. */
1498 rtx orig = SET_SRC (set);
1499 SET_SRC (set) = note;
1500 i2mod = temp;
1501 i2mod_old_rhs = copy_rtx (orig);
1502 i2mod_new_rhs = copy_rtx (note);
1503 next = try_combine (insn, i2mod, NULL, NULL,
1504 &new_direct_jump_p,
1505 last_combined_insn);
1506 i2mod = NULL;
1507 if (next)
1509 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "insn-with-note combine", 1);
1510 goto retry;
1512 SET_SRC (set) = orig;
1516 if (!NOTE_P (insn))
1517 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1519 retry:
1524 default_rtl_profile ();
1525 clear_bb_flags ();
1526 new_direct_jump_p |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
1527 delete_noop_moves ();
1529 /* Clean up. */
1530 obstack_free (&insn_link_obstack, NULL);
1531 free (uid_log_links);
1532 free (uid_insn_cost);
1533 reg_stat.release ();
1536 struct undo *undo, *next;
1537 for (undo = undobuf.frees; undo; undo = next)
1539 next = undo->next;
1540 free (undo);
1542 undobuf.frees = 0;
1545 total_attempts += combine_attempts;
1546 total_merges += combine_merges;
1547 total_extras += combine_extras;
1548 total_successes += combine_successes;
1550 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1551 rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
1553 /* Make recognizer allow volatile MEMs again. */
1554 init_recog ();
1556 return new_direct_jump_p;
1559 /* Wipe the last_xxx fields of reg_stat in preparation for another pass. */
1561 static void
1562 init_reg_last (void)
1564 unsigned int i;
1565 reg_stat_type *p;
1567 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (reg_stat, i, p)
1568 memset (p, 0, offsetof (reg_stat_type, sign_bit_copies));
1571 /* Set up any promoted values for incoming argument registers. */
1573 static void
1574 setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *first)
1576 tree arg;
1577 bool strictly_local = false;
1579 for (arg = DECL_ARGUMENTS (current_function_decl); arg;
1580 arg = DECL_CHAIN (arg))
1582 rtx x, reg = DECL_INCOMING_RTL (arg);
1583 int uns1, uns3;
1584 machine_mode mode1, mode2, mode3, mode4;
1586 /* Only continue if the incoming argument is in a register. */
1587 if (!REG_P (reg))
1588 continue;
1590 /* Determine, if possible, whether all call sites of the current
1591 function lie within the current compilation unit. (This does
1592 take into account the exporting of a function via taking its
1593 address, and so forth.) */
1594 strictly_local = cgraph_node::local_info (current_function_decl)->local;
1596 /* The mode and signedness of the argument before any promotions happen
1597 (equal to the mode of the pseudo holding it at that stage). */
1598 mode1 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1599 uns1 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1601 /* The mode and signedness of the argument after any source language and
1602 TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES-driven promotions. */
1603 mode2 = TYPE_MODE (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1604 uns3 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1606 /* The mode and signedness of the argument as it is actually passed,
1607 see assign_parm_setup_reg in function.c. */
1608 mode3 = promote_function_mode (TREE_TYPE (arg), mode1, &uns3,
1609 TREE_TYPE (cfun->decl), 0);
1611 /* The mode of the register in which the argument is being passed. */
1612 mode4 = GET_MODE (reg);
1614 /* Eliminate sign extensions in the callee when:
1615 (a) A mode promotion has occurred; */
1616 if (mode1 == mode3)
1617 continue;
1618 /* (b) The mode of the register is the same as the mode of
1619 the argument as it is passed; */
1620 if (mode3 != mode4)
1621 continue;
1622 /* (c) There's no language level extension; */
1623 if (mode1 == mode2)
1625 /* (c.1) All callers are from the current compilation unit. If that's
1626 the case we don't have to rely on an ABI, we only have to know
1627 what we're generating right now, and we know that we will do the
1628 mode1 to mode2 promotion with the given sign. */
1629 else if (!strictly_local)
1630 continue;
1631 /* (c.2) The combination of the two promotions is useful. This is
1632 true when the signs match, or if the first promotion is unsigned.
1633 In the later case, (sign_extend (zero_extend x)) is the same as
1634 (zero_extend (zero_extend x)), so make sure to force UNS3 true. */
1635 else if (uns1)
1636 uns3 = true;
1637 else if (uns3)
1638 continue;
1640 /* Record that the value was promoted from mode1 to mode3,
1641 so that any sign extension at the head of the current
1642 function may be eliminated. */
1643 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode1, const0_rtx);
1644 x = gen_rtx_fmt_e ((uns3 ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND), mode3, x);
1645 record_value_for_reg (reg, first, x);
1649 /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is narrower than
1650 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and is being set, record what bits are known zero.
1652 If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what
1653 portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will
1654 be happening.
1656 Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit
1657 at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied
1658 by any set of X. */
1660 static void
1661 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
1663 rtx_insn *insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
1664 unsigned int num;
1666 if (REG_P (x)
1667 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1668 /* If this register is undefined at the start of the file, we can't
1669 say what its contents were. */
1670 && ! REGNO_REG_SET_P
1671 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), REGNO (x))
1672 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
1674 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
1676 if (set == 0 || GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER)
1678 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1679 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1680 return;
1683 /* If this register is being initialized using itself, and the
1684 register is uninitialized in this basic block, and there are
1685 no LOG_LINKS which set the register, then part of the
1686 register is uninitialized. In that case we can't assume
1687 anything about the number of nonzero bits.
1689 ??? We could do better if we checked this in
1690 reg_{nonzero_bits,num_sign_bit_copies}_for_combine. Then we
1691 could avoid making assumptions about the insn which initially
1692 sets the register, while still using the information in other
1693 insns. We would have to be careful to check every insn
1694 involved in the combination. */
1696 if (insn
1697 && reg_referenced_p (x, PATTERN (insn))
1698 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P (DF_LR_IN (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn)),
1699 REGNO (x)))
1701 struct insn_link *link;
1703 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
1704 if (dead_or_set_p (link->insn, x))
1705 break;
1706 if (!link)
1708 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1709 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1710 return;
1714 /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a
1715 simple assignment. */
1716 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1718 /* If this is a simple assignment, or we have a paradoxical SUBREG,
1719 set what we know about X. */
1721 if (SET_DEST (set) == x
1722 || (paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (set))
1723 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set)) == x))
1725 rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
1727 #ifdef SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
1728 /* If X is narrower than a word and SRC is a non-negative
1729 constant that would appear negative in the mode of X,
1730 sign-extend it for use in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits because some
1731 machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension
1732 and this is the conservative approach.
1734 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard
1735 instead of this kludge. */
1737 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < BITS_PER_WORD
1738 && CONST_INT_P (src)
1739 && INTVAL (src) > 0
1740 && val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (x), INTVAL (src)))
1741 src = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)));
1742 #endif
1744 /* Don't call nonzero_bits if it cannot change anything. */
1745 if (rsp->nonzero_bits != ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0)
1746 rsp->nonzero_bits |= nonzero_bits (src, nonzero_bits_mode);
1747 num = num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set), GET_MODE (x));
1748 if (rsp->sign_bit_copies == 0
1749 || rsp->sign_bit_copies > num)
1750 rsp->sign_bit_copies = num;
1752 else
1754 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1755 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1760 /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED, PRED2, SUCC and SUCC2 are
1761 optionally insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be
1762 combined into the merger of INSN and I3. The order is PRED, PRED2,
1763 INSN, SUCC, SUCC2, I3.
1765 Return 0 if the combination is not allowed for any reason.
1767 If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single
1768 destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function
1769 will return 1. */
1771 static int
1772 can_combine_p (rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *pred ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1773 rtx_insn *pred2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx_insn *succ, rtx_insn *succ2,
1774 rtx *pdest, rtx *psrc)
1776 int i;
1777 const_rtx set = 0;
1778 rtx src, dest;
1779 rtx_insn *p;
1780 #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
1781 rtx link;
1782 #endif
1783 bool all_adjacent = true;
1784 int (*is_volatile_p) (const_rtx);
1786 if (succ)
1788 if (succ2)
1790 if (next_active_insn (succ2) != i3)
1791 all_adjacent = false;
1792 if (next_active_insn (succ) != succ2)
1793 all_adjacent = false;
1795 else if (next_active_insn (succ) != i3)
1796 all_adjacent = false;
1797 if (next_active_insn (insn) != succ)
1798 all_adjacent = false;
1800 else if (next_active_insn (insn) != i3)
1801 all_adjacent = false;
1803 /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG, a SUBREG or CC0.
1804 or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs.
1806 If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing.
1807 By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it
1808 is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact,
1809 needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by
1810 recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match.
1812 We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED
1813 note.
1815 Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't
1816 combine. */
1818 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
1819 set = PATTERN (insn);
1820 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL
1821 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, 0)) == SET)
1823 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++)
1825 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
1827 switch (GET_CODE (elt))
1829 /* This is important to combine floating point insns
1830 for the SH4 port. */
1831 case USE:
1832 /* Combining an isolated USE doesn't make sense.
1833 We depend here on combinable_i3pat to reject them. */
1834 /* The code below this loop only verifies that the inputs of
1835 the SET in INSN do not change. We call reg_set_between_p
1836 to verify that the REG in the USE does not change between
1837 I3 and INSN.
1838 If the USE in INSN was for a pseudo register, the matching
1839 insn pattern will likely match any register; combining this
1840 with any other USE would only be safe if we knew that the
1841 used registers have identical values, or if there was
1842 something to tell them apart, e.g. different modes. For
1843 now, we forgo such complicated tests and simply disallow
1844 combining of USES of pseudo registers with any other USE. */
1845 if (REG_P (XEXP (elt, 0))
1846 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
1848 rtx i3pat = PATTERN (i3);
1849 int i = XVECLEN (i3pat, 0) - 1;
1850 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (elt, 0));
1854 rtx i3elt = XVECEXP (i3pat, 0, i);
1856 if (GET_CODE (i3elt) == USE
1857 && REG_P (XEXP (i3elt, 0))
1858 && (REGNO (XEXP (i3elt, 0)) == regno
1859 ? reg_set_between_p (XEXP (elt, 0),
1860 PREV_INSN (insn), i3)
1861 : regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
1862 return 0;
1864 while (--i >= 0);
1866 break;
1868 /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */
1869 case CLOBBER:
1870 break;
1872 case SET:
1873 /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that
1874 have side-effects. */
1875 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (elt))
1876 && insn_nothrow_p (insn)
1877 && !side_effects_p (elt))
1878 break;
1880 /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and
1881 so we cannot combine with this insn. */
1882 if (set)
1883 return 0;
1885 set = elt;
1886 break;
1888 default:
1889 /* Anything else means we can't combine. */
1890 return 0;
1894 if (set == 0
1895 /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs,
1896 so don't do anything with it. */
1897 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == ASM_OPERANDS)
1898 return 0;
1900 else
1901 return 0;
1903 if (set == 0)
1904 return 0;
1906 /* The simplification in expand_field_assignment may call back to
1907 get_last_value, so set safe guard here. */
1908 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1910 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1911 src = SET_SRC (set), dest = SET_DEST (set);
1913 /* Do not eliminate user-specified register if it is in an
1914 asm input because we may break the register asm usage defined
1915 in GCC manual if allow to do so.
1916 Be aware that this may cover more cases than we expect but this
1917 should be harmless. */
1918 if (REG_P (dest) && REG_USERVAR_P (dest) && HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
1919 && extract_asm_operands (PATTERN (i3)))
1920 return 0;
1922 /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */
1923 if (dest == stack_pointer_rtx
1924 /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has
1925 a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a LIBCALL sequence. */
1926 || (rtx_equal_p (src, dest) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
1927 /* Can't merge an ASM_OPERANDS. */
1928 || GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
1929 /* Can't merge a function call. */
1930 || GET_CODE (src) == CALL
1931 /* Don't eliminate a function call argument. */
1932 || (CALL_P (i3)
1933 && (find_reg_fusage (i3, USE, dest)
1934 || (REG_P (dest)
1935 && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1936 && global_regs[REGNO (dest)])))
1937 /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */
1938 || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3, dest)
1939 || (succ && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ, dest))
1940 || (succ2 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ2, dest))
1941 /* Don't substitute into a non-local goto, this confuses CFG. */
1942 || (JUMP_P (i3) && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, NULL_RTX))
1943 /* Make sure that DEST is not used after SUCC but before I3. */
1944 || (!all_adjacent
1945 && ((succ2
1946 && (reg_used_between_p (dest, succ2, i3)
1947 || reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, succ2)))
1948 || (!succ2 && succ && reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, i3))))
1949 /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register
1950 does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However,
1951 If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we
1952 think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting
1953 the same destination; last_set of that register might point to
1954 a NOTE). If INSN has a REG_EQUIV note, the register is always
1955 equivalent to the memory so the substitution is valid even if there
1956 are intervening stores. Also, don't move a volatile asm or
1957 UNSPEC_VOLATILE across any other insns. */
1958 || (! all_adjacent
1959 && (((!MEM_P (src)
1960 || ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, src))
1961 && use_crosses_set_p (src, DF_INSN_LUID (insn)))
1962 || (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS && MEM_VOLATILE_P (src))
1963 || GET_CODE (src) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE))
1964 /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly
1965 change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not,
1966 and it is a pain to update that information.
1967 Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt.
1968 Accept that as a special case. */
1969 || (DF_INSN_LUID (insn) < last_call_luid && ! CONSTANT_P (src)))
1970 return 0;
1972 /* DEST must either be a REG or CC0. */
1973 if (REG_P (dest))
1975 /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all
1976 cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy
1977 insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the
1978 mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most
1979 insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn.
1981 Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard
1982 register. */
1984 if (REG_P (src)
1985 && ((REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1986 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (dest), GET_MODE (dest)))
1987 /* Don't extend the life of a hard register unless it is
1988 user variable (if we have few registers) or it can't
1989 fit into the desired register (meaning something special
1990 is going on).
1991 Also avoid substituting a return register into I3, because
1992 reload can't handle a conflict with constraints of other
1993 inputs. */
1994 || (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1995 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (src), GET_MODE (src)))))
1996 return 0;
1998 else if (GET_CODE (dest) != CC0)
1999 return 0;
2002 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
2003 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2004 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2006 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i), 0);
2008 /* If the clobber represents an earlyclobber operand, we must not
2009 substitute an expression containing the clobbered register.
2010 As we do not analyze the constraint strings here, we have to
2011 make the conservative assumption. However, if the register is
2012 a fixed hard reg, the clobber cannot represent any operand;
2013 we leave it up to the machine description to either accept or
2014 reject use-and-clobber patterns. */
2015 if (!REG_P (reg)
2016 || REGNO (reg) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2017 || !fixed_regs[REGNO (reg)])
2018 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, src))
2019 return 0;
2022 /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile
2023 or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3 */
2025 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS || volatile_refs_p (src))
2027 /* Make sure neither succ nor succ2 contains a volatile reference. */
2028 if (succ2 != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ2)))
2029 return 0;
2030 if (succ != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ)))
2031 return 0;
2032 /* We'll check insns between INSN and I3 below. */
2035 /* If INSN is an asm, and DEST is a hard register, reject, since it has
2036 to be an explicit register variable, and was chosen for a reason. */
2038 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
2039 && REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2040 return 0;
2042 /* If INSN contains volatile references (specifically volatile MEMs),
2043 we cannot combine across any other volatile references.
2044 Even if INSN doesn't contain volatile references, any intervening
2045 volatile insn might affect machine state. */
2047 is_volatile_p = volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (insn))
2048 ? volatile_refs_p
2049 : volatile_insn_p;
2051 for (p = NEXT_INSN (insn); p != i3; p = NEXT_INSN (p))
2052 if (INSN_P (p) && p != succ && p != succ2 && is_volatile_p (PATTERN (p)))
2053 return 0;
2055 /* If INSN contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, make sure that
2056 register is not used between there and I3, and not already used in
2057 I3 either. Neither must it be used in PRED or SUCC, if they exist.
2058 Also insist that I3 not be a jump; if it were one
2059 and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose. */
2061 #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
2062 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
2063 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
2064 && (JUMP_P (i3)
2065 || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link, 0), insn, i3)
2066 || (pred != NULL_RTX
2067 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred)))
2068 || (pred2 != NULL_RTX
2069 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred2)))
2070 || (succ != NULL_RTX
2071 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ)))
2072 || (succ2 != NULL_RTX
2073 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ2)))
2074 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i3))))
2075 return 0;
2076 #endif
2078 /* Don't combine an insn that follows a CC0-setting insn.
2079 An insn that uses CC0 must not be separated from the one that sets it.
2080 We do, however, allow I2 to follow a CC0-setting insn if that insn
2081 is passed as I1; in that case it will be deleted also.
2082 We also allow combining in this case if all the insns are adjacent
2083 because that would leave the two CC0 insns adjacent as well.
2084 It would be more logical to test whether CC0 occurs inside I1 or I2,
2085 but that would be much slower, and this ought to be equivalent. */
2087 if (HAVE_cc0)
2089 p = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
2090 if (p && p != pred && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (p))
2091 && ! all_adjacent)
2092 return 0;
2095 /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is
2096 to be allowed. */
2098 *pdest = dest;
2099 *psrc = src;
2101 return 1;
2104 /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component
2105 of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining.
2107 One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it
2108 entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST, I1DEST or I0DEST as
2109 doing so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns.
2111 Consider:
2113 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))
2114 (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>)
2116 This is NOT equivalent to:
2118 (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>)
2119 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))])
2121 Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid
2122 if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100.
2124 We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1
2125 uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that
2126 case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we
2127 must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both
2128 feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3.
2129 If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is nonzero, it means that finding I1 in the source
2130 of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. The same situation
2131 can occur for I0, in which case I0_NOT_IN_SRC is set.
2133 Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment
2134 into a set of logical operations.
2136 If PI3_DEST_KILLED is nonzero, it is a pointer to a location in which
2137 we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one
2138 such register is detected, we fail.
2140 Return 1 if the combination is valid, zero otherwise. */
2142 static int
2143 combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *i3, rtx *loc, rtx i2dest, rtx i1dest, rtx i0dest,
2144 int i1_not_in_src, int i0_not_in_src, rtx *pi3dest_killed)
2146 rtx x = *loc;
2148 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
2150 rtx set = x ;
2151 rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
2152 rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
2153 rtx inner_dest = dest;
2154 rtx subdest;
2156 while (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2157 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
2158 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2159 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0);
2161 /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as discussed
2162 above. We don't want to prevent pseudos from being combined
2163 into the address of a MEM, so only prevent the combination if
2164 i1 or i2 set the same MEM. */
2165 if ((inner_dest != dest &&
2166 (!MEM_P (inner_dest)
2167 || rtx_equal_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2168 || (i1dest && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2169 || (i0dest && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, inner_dest)))
2170 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2171 || (i1dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2172 || (i0dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, inner_dest))))
2174 /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except we can't test
2175 all_adjacent; we don't have to, since this instruction will stay
2176 in place, thus we are not considering increasing the lifetime of
2177 INNER_DEST.
2179 Also, if this insn sets a function argument, combining it with
2180 something that might need a spill could clobber a previous
2181 function argument; the all_adjacent test in can_combine_p also
2182 checks this; here, we do a more specific test for this case. */
2184 || (REG_P (inner_dest)
2185 && REGNO (inner_dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2186 && (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (inner_dest),
2187 GET_MODE (inner_dest))))
2188 || (i1_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, src))
2189 || (i0_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, src)))
2190 return 0;
2192 /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, so
2193 record that for later. We have to consider paradoxical
2194 subregs here, since they kill the whole register, but we
2195 ignore partial subregs, STRICT_LOW_PART, etc.
2196 Never add REG_DEAD notes for the FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM or the
2197 STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, since these are always considered to be
2198 live. Similarly for ARG_POINTER_REGNUM if it is fixed. */
2199 subdest = dest;
2200 if (GET_CODE (subdest) == SUBREG
2201 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (subdest))
2202 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subdest)))))
2203 subdest = SUBREG_REG (subdest);
2204 if (pi3dest_killed
2205 && REG_P (subdest)
2206 && reg_referenced_p (subdest, PATTERN (i3))
2207 && REGNO (subdest) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2208 #if !HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2209 && REGNO (subdest) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2210 #endif
2211 #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2212 && (REGNO (subdest) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2213 || ! fixed_regs [REGNO (subdest)])
2214 #endif
2215 && REGNO (subdest) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
2217 if (*pi3dest_killed)
2218 return 0;
2220 *pi3dest_killed = subdest;
2224 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
2226 int i;
2228 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (x, 0); i++)
2229 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &XVECEXP (x, 0, i), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
2230 i1_not_in_src, i0_not_in_src, pi3dest_killed))
2231 return 0;
2234 return 1;
2237 /* Return 1 if X is an arithmetic expression that contains a multiplication
2238 and division. We don't count multiplications by powers of two here. */
2240 static int
2241 contains_muldiv (rtx x)
2243 switch (GET_CODE (x))
2245 case MOD: case DIV: case UMOD: case UDIV:
2246 return 1;
2248 case MULT:
2249 return ! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
2250 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0);
2251 default:
2252 if (BINARY_P (x))
2253 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0))
2254 || contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 1));
2256 if (UNARY_P (x))
2257 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0));
2259 return 0;
2263 /* Determine whether INSN can be used in a combination. Return nonzero if
2264 not. This is used in try_combine to detect early some cases where we
2265 can't perform combinations. */
2267 static int
2268 cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2270 rtx set;
2271 rtx src, dest;
2273 /* If this isn't really an insn, we can't do anything.
2274 This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an
2275 auto-increment address. */
2276 if (! INSN_P (insn))
2277 return 1;
2279 /* Never combine loads and stores involving hard regs that are likely
2280 to be spilled. The register allocator can usually handle such
2281 reg-reg moves by tying. If we allow the combiner to make
2282 substitutions of likely-spilled regs, reload might die.
2283 As an exception, we allow combinations involving fixed regs; these are
2284 not available to the register allocator so there's no risk involved. */
2286 set = single_set (insn);
2287 if (! set)
2288 return 0;
2289 src = SET_SRC (set);
2290 dest = SET_DEST (set);
2291 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG)
2292 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
2293 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
2294 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
2295 if (REG_P (src) && REG_P (dest)
2296 && ((HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
2297 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (src))
2298 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (src))))
2299 || (HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
2300 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (dest))
2301 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (dest))))))
2302 return 1;
2304 return 0;
2307 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
2309 unsigned regno, nregs;
2310 unsigned mask;
2313 /* Called via note_stores by likely_spilled_retval_p. Remove from info->mask
2314 hard registers that are known to be written to / clobbered in full. */
2315 static void
2316 likely_spilled_retval_1 (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
2318 struct likely_spilled_retval_info *const info =
2319 (struct likely_spilled_retval_info *) data;
2320 unsigned regno, nregs;
2321 unsigned new_mask;
2323 if (!REG_P (XEXP (set, 0)))
2324 return;
2325 regno = REGNO (x);
2326 if (regno >= info->regno + info->nregs)
2327 return;
2328 nregs = hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (x)];
2329 if (regno + nregs <= info->regno)
2330 return;
2331 new_mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2332 if (regno < info->regno)
2333 new_mask >>= info->regno - regno;
2334 else
2335 new_mask <<= regno - info->regno;
2336 info->mask &= ~new_mask;
2339 /* Return nonzero iff part of the return value is live during INSN, and
2340 it is likely spilled. This can happen when more than one insn is needed
2341 to copy the return value, e.g. when we consider to combine into the
2342 second copy insn for a complex value. */
2344 static int
2345 likely_spilled_retval_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2347 rtx_insn *use = BB_END (this_basic_block);
2348 rtx reg;
2349 rtx_insn *p;
2350 unsigned regno, nregs;
2351 /* We assume here that no machine mode needs more than
2352 32 hard registers when the value overlaps with a register
2353 for which TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P is true. */
2354 unsigned mask;
2355 struct likely_spilled_retval_info info;
2357 if (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (use) || GET_CODE (PATTERN (use)) != USE || insn == use)
2358 return 0;
2359 reg = XEXP (PATTERN (use), 0);
2360 if (!REG_P (reg) || !targetm.calls.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (reg)))
2361 return 0;
2362 regno = REGNO (reg);
2363 nregs = hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (reg)];
2364 if (nregs == 1)
2365 return 0;
2366 mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2368 /* Disregard parts of the return value that are set later. */
2369 info.regno = regno;
2370 info.nregs = nregs;
2371 info.mask = mask;
2372 for (p = PREV_INSN (use); info.mask && p != insn; p = PREV_INSN (p))
2373 if (INSN_P (p))
2374 note_stores (PATTERN (p), likely_spilled_retval_1, &info);
2375 mask = info.mask;
2377 /* Check if any of the (probably) live return value registers is
2378 likely spilled. */
2379 nregs --;
2382 if ((mask & 1 << nregs)
2383 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno + nregs)))
2384 return 1;
2385 } while (nregs--);
2386 return 0;
2389 /* Adjust INSN after we made a change to its destination.
2391 Changing the destination can invalidate notes that say something about
2392 the results of the insn and a LOG_LINK pointing to the insn. */
2394 static void
2395 adjust_for_new_dest (rtx_insn *insn)
2397 /* For notes, be conservative and simply remove them. */
2398 remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (insn);
2400 /* The new insn will have a destination that was previously the destination
2401 of an insn just above it. Call distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from
2402 the next use of that destination. */
2404 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2405 gcc_assert (set);
2407 rtx reg = SET_DEST (set);
2409 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
2410 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2411 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
2412 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
2413 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg));
2415 distribute_links (alloc_insn_link (insn, REGNO (reg), NULL));
2417 df_insn_rescan (insn);
2420 /* Return TRUE if combine can reuse reg X in mode MODE.
2421 ADDED_SETS is nonzero if the original set is still required. */
2422 static bool
2423 can_change_dest_mode (rtx x, int added_sets, machine_mode mode)
2425 unsigned int regno;
2427 if (!REG_P (x))
2428 return false;
2430 regno = REGNO (x);
2431 /* Allow hard registers if the new mode is legal, and occupies no more
2432 registers than the old mode. */
2433 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2434 return (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode)
2435 && (hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (x)]
2436 >= hard_regno_nregs[regno][mode]));
2438 /* Or a pseudo that is only used once. */
2439 return (regno < reg_n_sets_max
2440 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
2441 && !added_sets
2442 && !REG_USERVAR_P (x));
2446 /* Check whether X, the destination of a set, refers to part of
2447 the register specified by REG. */
2449 static bool
2450 reg_subword_p (rtx x, rtx reg)
2452 /* Check that reg is an integer mode register. */
2453 if (!REG_P (reg) || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (reg)) != MODE_INT)
2454 return false;
2456 if (GET_CODE (x) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2457 || GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2458 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2460 return GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
2461 && SUBREG_REG (x) == reg
2462 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT;
2465 /* Delete the unconditional jump INSN and adjust the CFG correspondingly.
2466 Note that the INSN should be deleted *after* removing dead edges, so
2467 that the kept edge is the fallthrough edge for a (set (pc) (pc))
2468 but not for a (set (pc) (label_ref FOO)). */
2470 static void
2471 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (rtx_insn *insn)
2473 basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
2474 gcc_assert (BB_END (bb) == insn);
2476 purge_dead_edges (bb);
2478 delete_insn (insn);
2479 if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 1)
2481 rtx_insn *insn;
2483 single_succ_edge (bb)->flags |= EDGE_FALLTHRU;
2485 /* Remove barriers from the footer if there are any. */
2486 for (insn = BB_FOOTER (bb); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
2487 if (BARRIER_P (insn))
2489 if (PREV_INSN (insn))
2490 SET_NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2491 else
2492 BB_FOOTER (bb) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2493 if (NEXT_INSN (insn))
2494 SET_PREV_INSN (NEXT_INSN (insn)) = PREV_INSN (insn);
2496 else if (LABEL_P (insn))
2497 break;
2501 /* Return whether PAT is a PARALLEL of exactly N register SETs followed
2502 by an arbitrary number of CLOBBERs. */
2503 static bool
2504 is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx pat, int n)
2506 if (GET_CODE (pat) != PARALLEL)
2507 return false;
2509 int len = XVECLEN (pat, 0);
2510 if (len < n)
2511 return false;
2513 int i;
2514 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2515 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != SET
2516 || !REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2517 return false;
2518 for ( ; i < len; i++)
2519 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER)
2520 return false;
2522 return true;
2525 #if !HAVE_cc0
2526 /* Return whether INSN, a PARALLEL of N register SETs (and maybe some
2527 CLOBBERs), can be split into individual SETs in that order, without
2528 changing semantics. */
2529 static bool
2530 can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx_insn *insn, int n)
2532 if (!insn_nothrow_p (insn))
2533 return false;
2535 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
2537 int i, j;
2538 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2540 if (side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2541 return false;
2543 rtx reg = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
2545 for (j = i + 1; j < n; j++)
2546 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, XVECEXP (pat, 0, j)))
2547 return false;
2550 return true;
2552 #endif
2554 /* Try to combine the insns I0, I1 and I2 into I3.
2555 Here I0, I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3.
2556 I0 and I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3, or I1 and I2 into
2559 If we are combining more than two insns and the resulting insn is not
2560 recognized, try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3
2561 are retained and I1/I0 are pseudo-deleted by turning them into a NOTE.
2562 Otherwise, I0, I1 and I2 are pseudo-deleted.
2564 Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed.
2565 If we did the combination, return the insn at which combine should
2566 resume scanning.
2568 Set NEW_DIRECT_JUMP_P to a nonzero value if try_combine creates a
2569 new direct jump instruction.
2571 LAST_COMBINED_INSN is either I3, or some insn after I3 that has
2572 been I3 passed to an earlier try_combine within the same basic
2573 block. */
2575 static rtx_insn *
2576 try_combine (rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i0,
2577 int *new_direct_jump_p, rtx_insn *last_combined_insn)
2579 /* New patterns for I3 and I2, respectively. */
2580 rtx newpat, newi2pat = 0;
2581 rtvec newpat_vec_with_clobbers = 0;
2582 int substed_i2 = 0, substed_i1 = 0, substed_i0 = 0;
2583 /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I0, I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not
2584 dead. */
2585 int added_sets_0, added_sets_1, added_sets_2;
2586 /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */
2587 int total_sets;
2588 /* Nonzero if I2's or I1's body now appears in I3. */
2589 int i2_is_used = 0, i1_is_used = 0;
2590 /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */
2591 int insn_code_number, i2_code_number = 0, other_code_number = 0;
2592 /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means
2593 that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into
2594 I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */
2595 rtx i3dest_killed = 0;
2596 /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2, I1 and I0. */
2597 rtx i2dest = 0, i2src = 0, i1dest = 0, i1src = 0, i0dest = 0, i0src = 0;
2598 /* Copy of SET_SRC of I1 and I0, if needed. */
2599 rtx i1src_copy = 0, i0src_copy = 0, i0src_copy2 = 0;
2600 /* Set if I2DEST was reused as a scratch register. */
2601 bool i2scratch = false;
2602 /* The PATTERNs of I0, I1, and I2, or a copy of them in certain cases. */
2603 rtx i0pat = 0, i1pat = 0, i2pat = 0;
2604 /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */
2605 int i2dest_in_i2src = 0, i1dest_in_i1src = 0, i2dest_in_i1src = 0;
2606 int i0dest_in_i0src = 0, i1dest_in_i0src = 0, i2dest_in_i0src = 0;
2607 int i2dest_killed = 0, i1dest_killed = 0, i0dest_killed = 0;
2608 int i1_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i1_n = 0;
2609 /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */
2610 rtx new_i3_notes, new_i2_notes;
2611 /* Notes that we substituted I3 into I2 instead of the normal case. */
2612 int i3_subst_into_i2 = 0;
2613 /* Notes that I1, I2 or I3 is a MULT operation. */
2614 int have_mult = 0;
2615 int swap_i2i3 = 0;
2616 int changed_i3_dest = 0;
2618 int maxreg;
2619 rtx_insn *temp_insn;
2620 rtx temp_expr;
2621 struct insn_link *link;
2622 rtx other_pat = 0;
2623 rtx new_other_notes;
2624 int i;
2626 /* Immediately return if any of I0,I1,I2 are the same insn (I3 can
2627 never be). */
2628 if (i1 == i2 || i0 == i2 || (i0 && i0 == i1))
2629 return 0;
2631 /* Only try four-insn combinations when there's high likelihood of
2632 success. Look for simple insns, such as loads of constants or
2633 binary operations involving a constant. */
2634 if (i0)
2636 int i;
2637 int ngood = 0;
2638 int nshift = 0;
2639 rtx set0, set3;
2641 if (!flag_expensive_optimizations)
2642 return 0;
2644 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
2646 rtx_insn *insn = i == 0 ? i0 : i == 1 ? i1 : i == 2 ? i2 : i3;
2647 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2648 rtx src;
2649 if (!set)
2650 continue;
2651 src = SET_SRC (set);
2652 if (CONSTANT_P (src))
2654 ngood += 2;
2655 break;
2657 else if (BINARY_P (src) && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
2658 ngood++;
2659 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT || GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFTRT
2660 || GET_CODE (src) == LSHIFTRT)
2661 nshift++;
2664 /* If I0 loads a memory and I3 sets the same memory, then I1 and I2
2665 are likely manipulating its value. Ideally we'll be able to combine
2666 all four insns into a bitfield insertion of some kind.
2668 Note the source in I0 might be inside a sign/zero extension and the
2669 memory modes in I0 and I3 might be different. So extract the address
2670 from the destination of I3 and search for it in the source of I0.
2672 In the event that there's a match but the source/dest do not actually
2673 refer to the same memory, the worst that happens is we try some
2674 combinations that we wouldn't have otherwise. */
2675 if ((set0 = single_set (i0))
2676 /* Ensure the source of SET0 is a MEM, possibly buried inside
2677 an extension. */
2678 && (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == MEM
2679 || ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
2680 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
2681 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set0), 0)) == MEM))
2682 && (set3 = single_set (i3))
2683 /* Ensure the destination of SET3 is a MEM. */
2684 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set3)) == MEM
2685 /* Would it be better to extract the base address for the MEM
2686 in SET3 and look for that? I don't have cases where it matters
2687 but I could envision such cases. */
2688 && rtx_referenced_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set3), 0), SET_SRC (set0)))
2689 ngood += 2;
2691 if (ngood < 2 && nshift < 2)
2692 return 0;
2695 /* Exit early if one of the insns involved can't be used for
2696 combinations. */
2697 if (CALL_P (i2)
2698 || (i1 && CALL_P (i1))
2699 || (i0 && CALL_P (i0))
2700 || cant_combine_insn_p (i3)
2701 || cant_combine_insn_p (i2)
2702 || (i1 && cant_combine_insn_p (i1))
2703 || (i0 && cant_combine_insn_p (i0))
2704 || likely_spilled_retval_p (i3))
2705 return 0;
2707 combine_attempts++;
2708 undobuf.other_insn = 0;
2710 /* Reset the hard register usage information. */
2711 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
2713 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
2715 if (i0)
2716 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2717 INSN_UID (i0), INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2718 else if (i1)
2719 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2720 INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2721 else
2722 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d -> %d:\n",
2723 INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2726 /* If multiple insns feed into one of I2 or I3, they can be in any
2727 order. To simplify the code below, reorder them in sequence. */
2728 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2729 temp_insn = i2, i2 = i0, i0 = temp_insn;
2730 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i1))
2731 temp_insn = i1, i1 = i0, i0 = temp_insn;
2732 if (i1 && DF_INSN_LUID (i1) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2733 temp_insn = i1, i1 = i2, i2 = temp_insn;
2735 added_links_insn = 0;
2737 /* First check for one important special case that the code below will
2738 not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 is a PARALLEL
2739 and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case,
2740 we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3.
2741 This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and
2742 remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation
2743 directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies.
2745 Note that this case handles both multiple sets in I2 and also cases
2746 where I2 has a number of CLOBBERs inside the PARALLEL.
2748 We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the
2749 most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case
2750 where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register
2751 usage tests. */
2753 if (i1 == 0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (i3) && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2754 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2755 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2756 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2757 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL
2758 && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2759 /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code
2760 below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p
2761 doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations;
2762 the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */
2763 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
2764 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
2765 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)),
2766 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2767 && next_active_insn (i2) == i3)
2769 rtx p2 = PATTERN (i2);
2771 /* Make sure that the destination of I3,
2772 which we are going to substitute into one output of I2,
2773 is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this:
2774 (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...)
2775 (set (reg 69) ...)])
2776 which is not well-defined as to order of actions.
2777 (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.)
2779 The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref,
2780 if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref. */
2781 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2782 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2783 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2784 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)),
2785 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))))
2786 break;
2788 /* Make sure this PARALLEL is not an asm. We do not allow combining
2789 that usually (see can_combine_p), so do not here either. */
2790 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2791 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2792 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
2793 break;
2795 if (i == XVECLEN (p2, 0))
2796 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2797 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2798 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2800 combine_merges++;
2802 subst_insn = i3;
2803 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2805 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2806 i2src = SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2807 i2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2808 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2810 /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting
2811 insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we validate
2812 the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2813 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)), SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)));
2814 newpat = p2;
2815 i3_subst_into_i2 = 1;
2816 goto validate_replacement;
2820 /* If I2 is setting a pseudo to a constant and I3 is setting some
2821 sub-part of it to another constant, merge them by making a new
2822 constant. */
2823 if (i1 == 0
2824 && (temp_expr = single_set (i2)) != 0
2825 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (temp_expr))
2826 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2827 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2828 && reg_subword_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2830 rtx dest = SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3));
2831 int offset = -1;
2832 int width = 0;
2834 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2836 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
2837 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 2)))
2839 width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
2840 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 2));
2841 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2842 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
2843 offset = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) - width - offset;
2846 else
2848 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
2849 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2850 width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2851 offset = 0;
2854 if (offset >= 0)
2856 /* If this is the low part, we're done. */
2857 if (subreg_lowpart_p (dest))
2859 /* Handle the case where inner is twice the size of outer. */
2860 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2861 == 2 * GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)))
2862 offset += GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2863 /* Otherwise give up for now. */
2864 else
2865 offset = -1;
2868 if (offset >= 0)
2870 rtx inner = SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3));
2871 rtx outer = SET_SRC (temp_expr);
2873 wide_int o
2874 = wi::insert (std::make_pair (outer, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))),
2875 std::make_pair (inner, GET_MODE (dest)),
2876 offset, width);
2878 combine_merges++;
2879 subst_insn = i3;
2880 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2881 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2882 i2dest = SET_DEST (temp_expr);
2883 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2885 /* Replace the source in I2 with the new constant and make the
2886 resulting insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we
2887 validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2888 SUBST (SET_SRC (temp_expr),
2889 immed_wide_int_const (o, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))));
2891 newpat = PATTERN (i2);
2893 /* The dest of I3 has been replaced with the dest of I2. */
2894 changed_i3_dest = 1;
2895 goto validate_replacement;
2899 #if !HAVE_cc0
2900 /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like:
2901 (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0)))
2902 (set Y OP)])
2903 make up a dummy I1 that is
2904 (set Y OP)
2905 and change I2 to be
2906 (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0)))
2908 (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.)
2910 This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and-
2911 decrement insn. */
2913 if (i1 == 0
2914 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2915 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))))
2916 == MODE_CC)
2917 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))) == COMPARE
2918 && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx
2919 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 0),
2920 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)))
2921 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2922 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2924 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2925 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2926 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2927 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2929 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2930 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2931 -1, NULL_RTX);
2932 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2934 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0));
2935 SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2)), 0),
2936 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2937 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2938 SUBST_LINK (LOG_LINKS (i2),
2939 alloc_insn_link (i1, regno, LOG_LINKS (i2)));
2942 /* If I2 is a PARALLEL of two SETs of REGs (and perhaps some CLOBBERs),
2943 make those two SETs separate I1 and I2 insns, and make an I0 that is
2944 the original I1. */
2945 if (i0 == 0
2946 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2947 && can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (i2, 2)
2948 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2949 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2951 /* If there is no I1, there is no I0 either. */
2952 i0 = i1;
2954 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2955 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2956 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2957 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2959 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2960 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2961 -1, NULL_RTX);
2962 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2964 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1));
2966 #endif
2968 /* Verify that I2 and I1 are valid for combining. */
2969 if (! can_combine_p (i2, i3, i0, i1, NULL, NULL, &i2dest, &i2src)
2970 || (i1 && ! can_combine_p (i1, i3, i0, NULL, i2, NULL,
2971 &i1dest, &i1src))
2972 || (i0 && ! can_combine_p (i0, i3, NULL, NULL, i1, i2,
2973 &i0dest, &i0src)))
2975 undo_all ();
2976 return 0;
2979 /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other
2980 cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */
2981 i2dest_in_i2src = reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i2src);
2982 i1dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i1src);
2983 i2dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i1src);
2984 i0dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i0src);
2985 i1dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0src);
2986 i2dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i0src);
2987 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2988 i1dest_killed = i1 && dead_or_set_p (i1, i1dest);
2989 i0dest_killed = i0 && dead_or_set_p (i0, i0dest);
2991 /* For the earlier insns, determine which of the subsequent ones they
2992 feed. */
2993 i1_feeds_i2_n = i1 && insn_a_feeds_b (i1, i2);
2994 i0_feeds_i1_n = i0 && insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i1);
2995 i0_feeds_i2_n = (i0 && (!i0_feeds_i1_n ? insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i2)
2996 : (!reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0dest)
2997 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i2src))));
2999 /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */
3000 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
3001 i1 && i2dest_in_i1src && !i1_feeds_i2_n,
3002 i0 && ((i2dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i2_n)
3003 || (i1dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i1_n)),
3004 &i3dest_killed))
3006 undo_all ();
3007 return 0;
3010 /* See if any of the insns is a MULT operation. Unless one is, we will
3011 reject a combination that is, since it must be slower. Be conservative
3012 here. */
3013 if (GET_CODE (i2src) == MULT
3014 || (i1 != 0 && GET_CODE (i1src) == MULT)
3015 || (i0 != 0 && GET_CODE (i0src) == MULT)
3016 || (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3017 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == MULT))
3018 have_mult = 1;
3020 /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd.
3021 We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an
3022 output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like
3023 mov r3,(r3)+
3024 which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the
3025 source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */
3027 #if 0
3028 if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3029 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
3030 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
3031 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_INC
3032 || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_DEC)))
3033 /* It's not the exception. */
3034 #endif
3035 #ifdef AUTO_INC_DEC
3037 rtx link;
3038 for (link = REG_NOTES (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
3039 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
3040 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i2))
3041 || (i1 != 0
3042 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i1)))))
3044 undo_all ();
3045 return 0;
3048 #endif
3050 /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged
3051 instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3.
3052 For the SET in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3.
3054 For the SET in I1, we have two cases: if I1 and I2 independently feed
3055 into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies
3056 or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set
3057 in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either
3058 I2 or I3. The same considerations apply to I0. */
3060 added_sets_2 = !dead_or_set_p (i3, i2dest);
3062 if (i1)
3063 added_sets_1 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i1dest)
3064 || (i1_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)));
3065 else
3066 added_sets_1 = 0;
3068 if (i0)
3069 added_sets_0 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i0dest)
3070 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest))
3071 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3072 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest)));
3073 else
3074 added_sets_0 = 0;
3076 /* We are about to copy insns for the case where they need to be kept
3077 around. Check that they can be copied in the merged instruction. */
3079 if (targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p
3080 && ((added_sets_2 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i2))
3081 || (i1 && added_sets_1 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i1))
3082 || (i0 && added_sets_0 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i0))))
3084 undo_all ();
3085 return 0;
3088 /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of
3089 PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in
3090 PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into
3091 an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential
3092 rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to
3093 I2DEST. */
3095 if (added_sets_2)
3097 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL)
3098 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, i2dest, copy_rtx (i2src));
3099 else
3100 i2pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i2));
3103 if (added_sets_1)
3105 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1)) == PARALLEL)
3106 i1pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, i1dest, copy_rtx (i1src));
3107 else
3108 i1pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i1));
3111 if (added_sets_0)
3113 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i0)) == PARALLEL)
3114 i0pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, i0dest, copy_rtx (i0src));
3115 else
3116 i0pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i0));
3119 combine_merges++;
3121 /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */
3123 maxreg = max_reg_num ();
3125 subst_insn = i3;
3127 /* Many machines that don't use CC0 have insns that can both perform an
3128 arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will
3129 be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector
3130 being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero.
3131 The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result
3132 of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't
3133 match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test
3134 for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are
3135 needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with
3136 I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */
3138 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i1 == 0 && added_sets_2 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3139 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == COMPARE
3140 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1))
3141 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 0), i2dest))
3143 rtx newpat_dest;
3144 rtx *cc_use_loc = NULL;
3145 rtx_insn *cc_use_insn = NULL;
3146 rtx op0 = i2src, op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1);
3147 machine_mode compare_mode, orig_compare_mode;
3148 enum rtx_code compare_code = UNKNOWN, orig_compare_code = UNKNOWN;
3150 newpat = PATTERN (i3);
3151 newpat_dest = SET_DEST (newpat);
3152 compare_mode = orig_compare_mode = GET_MODE (newpat_dest);
3154 if (undobuf.other_insn == 0
3155 && (cc_use_loc = find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat), i3,
3156 &cc_use_insn)))
3158 compare_code = orig_compare_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use_loc);
3159 compare_code = simplify_compare_const (compare_code,
3160 GET_MODE (i2dest), op0, &op1);
3161 target_canonicalize_comparison (&compare_code, &op0, &op1, 1);
3164 /* Do the rest only if op1 is const0_rtx, which may be the
3165 result of simplification. */
3166 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3168 /* If a single use of the CC is found, prepare to modify it
3169 when SELECT_CC_MODE returns a new CC-class mode, or when
3170 the above simplify_compare_const() returned a new comparison
3171 operator. undobuf.other_insn is assigned the CC use insn
3172 when modifying it. */
3173 if (cc_use_loc)
3175 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
3176 machine_mode new_mode
3177 = SELECT_CC_MODE (compare_code, op0, op1);
3178 if (new_mode != orig_compare_mode
3179 && can_change_dest_mode (SET_DEST (newpat),
3180 added_sets_2, new_mode))
3182 unsigned int regno = REGNO (newpat_dest);
3183 compare_mode = new_mode;
3184 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3185 newpat_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
3186 else
3188 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
3189 newpat_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
3192 #endif
3193 /* Cases for modifying the CC-using comparison. */
3194 if (compare_code != orig_compare_code
3195 /* ??? Do we need to verify the zero rtx? */
3196 && XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 1) == const0_rtx)
3198 /* Replace cc_use_loc with entire new RTX. */
3199 SUBST (*cc_use_loc,
3200 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, compare_mode,
3201 newpat_dest, const0_rtx));
3202 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3204 else if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3206 /* Just replace the CC reg with a new mode. */
3207 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 0), newpat_dest);
3208 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3212 /* Now we modify the current newpat:
3213 First, SET_DEST(newpat) is updated if the CC mode has been
3214 altered. For targets without SELECT_CC_MODE, this should be
3215 optimized away. */
3216 if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3217 SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat), newpat_dest);
3218 /* This is always done to propagate i2src into newpat. */
3219 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3220 gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
3221 /* Create new version of i2pat if needed; the below PARALLEL
3222 creation needs this to work correctly. */
3223 if (! rtx_equal_p (i2src, op0))
3224 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, i2dest, op0);
3225 i2_is_used = 1;
3229 if (i2_is_used == 0)
3231 /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing
3232 an unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something
3233 that is known to have the high part zero. Handle that case
3234 by letting subst look at the inner insns.
3236 Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries
3237 to simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more
3238 insns. We don't do this because of the potential of infinite
3239 loops and because of the potential extra memory required.
3240 However, doing it the way we are is a bit of a kludge and
3241 doesn't catch all cases.
3243 But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows
3244 things down and doesn't usually win.
3246 This is not done in the COMPARE case above because the
3247 unmodified I2PAT is used in the PARALLEL and so a pattern
3248 with a modified I2SRC would not match. */
3250 if (flag_expensive_optimizations)
3252 /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just
3253 simplifications. */
3254 if (i1)
3256 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3257 i1src = subst (i1src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3260 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3261 i2src = subst (i2src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3264 n_occurrences = 0; /* `subst' counts here */
3265 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3267 /* If I1 feeds into I2 and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we need to make a unique
3268 copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3269 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I1SRC for I1DEST
3270 later. Likewise if I0 feeds into I2, either directly or indirectly
3271 through I1, and I0DEST is in I0SRC. */
3272 newpat = subst (PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i2src, 0, 0,
3273 (i1_feeds_i2_n && i1dest_in_i1src)
3274 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3275 && i0dest_in_i0src));
3276 substed_i2 = 1;
3278 /* Record whether I2's body now appears within I3's body. */
3279 i2_is_used = n_occurrences;
3282 /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, try to
3283 substitute I1 if we have it. */
3285 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3287 /* Check that an autoincrement side-effect on I1 has not been lost.
3288 This happens if I1DEST is mentioned in I2 and dies there, and
3289 has disappeared from the new pattern. */
3290 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3291 && i1_feeds_i2_n
3292 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)
3293 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, newpat))
3294 /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done
3295 above (see detailed comments there) that ensures I1DEST isn't
3296 mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */
3297 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i1dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3298 0, 0, 0))
3300 undo_all ();
3301 return 0;
3304 n_occurrences = 0;
3305 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3307 /* If the following substitution will modify I1SRC, make a copy of it
3308 for the case where it is substituted for I1DEST in I2PAT later. */
3309 if (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3310 i1src_copy = copy_rtx (i1src);
3312 /* If I0 feeds into I1 and I0DEST is in I0SRC, we need to make a unique
3313 copy of I1SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3314 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I0SRC for I0DEST
3315 later. */
3316 newpat = subst (newpat, i1dest, i1src, 0, 0,
3317 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3318 substed_i1 = 1;
3320 /* Record whether I1's body now appears within I3's body. */
3321 i1_is_used = n_occurrences;
3324 /* Likewise for I0 if we have it. */
3326 if (i0 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3328 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3329 && ((i0_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest))
3330 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest)))
3331 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, newpat))
3332 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i0dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3333 0, 0, 0))
3335 undo_all ();
3336 return 0;
3339 /* If the following substitution will modify I0SRC, make a copy of it
3340 for the case where it is substituted for I0DEST in I1PAT later. */
3341 if (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3342 i0src_copy = copy_rtx (i0src);
3343 /* And a copy for I0DEST in I2PAT substitution. */
3344 if (added_sets_2 && ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3345 || (i0_feeds_i2_n)))
3346 i0src_copy2 = copy_rtx (i0src);
3348 n_occurrences = 0;
3349 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
3350 newpat = subst (newpat, i0dest, i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3351 substed_i0 = 1;
3354 /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful
3355 to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */
3356 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2, NULL_RTX) != 0
3357 && i2_is_used + added_sets_2 > 1)
3358 || (i1 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3359 && (i1_is_used + added_sets_1 + (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3360 > 1))
3361 || (i0 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3362 && (n_occurrences + added_sets_0
3363 + (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3364 + (added_sets_2 && i0_feeds_i2_n)
3365 > 1))
3366 /* Fail if we tried to make a new register. */
3367 || max_reg_num () != maxreg
3368 /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */
3369 || GET_CODE (newpat) == CLOBBER
3370 /* Fail if this new pattern is a MULT and we didn't have one before
3371 at the outer level. */
3372 || (GET_CODE (newpat) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat)) == MULT
3373 && ! have_mult))
3375 undo_all ();
3376 return 0;
3379 /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept
3380 in addition to substituting them into the latest one,
3381 we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn
3382 to hold additional the SETs. */
3384 if (added_sets_0 || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)
3386 int extra_sets = added_sets_0 + added_sets_1 + added_sets_2;
3387 combine_extras++;
3389 if (GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL)
3391 rtvec old = XVEC (newpat, 0);
3392 total_sets = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) + extra_sets;
3393 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3394 memcpy (XVEC (newpat, 0)->elem, &old->elem[0],
3395 sizeof (old->elem[0]) * old->num_elem);
3397 else
3399 rtx old = newpat;
3400 total_sets = 1 + extra_sets;
3401 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3402 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = old;
3405 if (added_sets_0)
3406 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = i0pat;
3408 if (added_sets_1)
3410 rtx t = i1pat;
3411 if (i0_feeds_i1_n)
3412 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy ? i0src_copy : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3414 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3416 if (added_sets_2)
3418 rtx t = i2pat;
3419 if (i1_feeds_i2_n)
3420 t = subst (t, i1dest, i1src_copy ? i1src_copy : i1src, 0, 0,
3421 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3422 if ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n) || i0_feeds_i2_n)
3423 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy2 ? i0src_copy2 : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3425 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3429 validate_replacement:
3431 /* Note which hard regs this insn has as inputs. */
3432 mark_used_regs_combine (newpat);
3434 /* If recog_for_combine fails, it strips existing clobbers. If we'll
3435 consider splitting this pattern, we might need these clobbers. */
3436 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3437 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - 1)) == CLOBBER)
3439 int len = XVECLEN (newpat, 0);
3441 newpat_vec_with_clobbers = rtvec_alloc (len);
3442 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
3443 RTVEC_ELT (newpat_vec_with_clobbers, i) = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i);
3446 /* We have recognized nothing yet. */
3447 insn_code_number = -1;
3449 /* See if this is a PARALLEL of two SETs where one SET's destination is
3450 a register that is unused and this isn't marked as an instruction that
3451 might trap in an EH region. In that case, we just need the other SET.
3452 We prefer this over the PARALLEL.
3454 This can occur when simplifying a divmod insn. We *must* test for this
3455 case here because the code below that splits two independent SETs doesn't
3456 handle this case correctly when it updates the register status.
3458 It's pointless doing this if we originally had two sets, one from
3459 i3, and one from i2. Combining then splitting the parallel results
3460 in the original i2 again plus an invalid insn (which we delete).
3461 The net effect is only to move instructions around, which makes
3462 debug info less accurate. */
3464 if (!(added_sets_2 && i1 == 0)
3465 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (newpat, 2)
3466 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3468 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3469 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3470 rtx oldpat = newpat;
3472 if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3473 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set1)))
3474 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3475 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1)))))
3476 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3477 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set1)))
3479 newpat = set0;
3480 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3483 else if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3484 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set0)))
3485 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3486 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3487 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0)))))
3488 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3489 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set0)))
3491 newpat = set1;
3492 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3494 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3495 changed_i3_dest = 1;
3498 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3499 newpat = oldpat;
3502 /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */
3503 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3504 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3506 /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET
3507 with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two
3508 insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a
3509 machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large
3510 constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */
3512 if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
3513 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3515 rtx parallel, *split;
3516 rtx_insn *m_split_insn;
3518 /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it
3519 use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case,
3520 convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */
3522 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (newpat, i3);
3524 /* We can only use I2DEST as a scratch reg if it doesn't overlap any
3525 inputs of NEWPAT. */
3527 /* ??? If I2DEST is not safe, and I1DEST exists, then it would be
3528 possible to try that as a scratch reg. This would require adding
3529 more code to make it work though. */
3531 if (m_split_insn == 0 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, newpat))
3533 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat));
3535 /* First try to split using the original register as a
3536 scratch register. */
3537 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
3538 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3539 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3540 i2dest)));
3541 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3543 /* If that didn't work, try changing the mode of I2DEST if
3544 we can. */
3545 if (m_split_insn == 0
3546 && new_mode != GET_MODE (i2dest)
3547 && new_mode != VOIDmode
3548 && can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2, new_mode))
3550 machine_mode old_mode = GET_MODE (i2dest);
3551 rtx ni2dest;
3553 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3554 ni2dest = gen_rtx_REG (new_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3555 else
3557 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], new_mode);
3558 ni2dest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3561 parallel = (gen_rtx_PARALLEL
3562 (VOIDmode,
3563 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3564 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3565 ni2dest))));
3566 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3568 if (m_split_insn == 0
3569 && REGNO (i2dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3571 struct undo *buf;
3573 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], old_mode);
3574 buf = undobuf.undos;
3575 undobuf.undos = buf->next;
3576 buf->next = undobuf.frees;
3577 undobuf.frees = buf;
3581 i2scratch = m_split_insn != 0;
3584 /* If recog_for_combine has discarded clobbers, try to use them
3585 again for the split. */
3586 if (m_split_insn == 0 && newpat_vec_with_clobbers)
3588 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, newpat_vec_with_clobbers);
3589 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3592 if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn) == NULL_RTX)
3594 rtx m_split_pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3595 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&m_split_pat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3596 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3597 newpat = m_split_pat;
3599 else if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn)) == NULL_RTX
3600 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3601 || ! use_crosses_set_p (PATTERN (m_split_insn), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))))
3603 rtx i2set, i3set;
3604 rtx newi3pat = PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3605 newi2pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3607 i3set = single_set (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3608 i2set = single_set (m_split_insn);
3610 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3612 /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track
3613 register status, so don't use these insns. If I2's destination
3614 is used between I2 and I3, we also can't use these insns. */
3616 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && i2set && i3set
3617 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3618 || ! reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (i2set), i2, i3)))
3619 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi3pat, i3,
3620 &new_i3_notes);
3621 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3622 newpat = newi3pat;
3624 /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3.
3625 If so, we must show an extra use of it. */
3627 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3629 rtx new_i3_dest = SET_DEST (i3set);
3630 rtx new_i2_dest = SET_DEST (i2set);
3632 while (GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3633 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3634 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == SUBREG)
3635 new_i3_dest = XEXP (new_i3_dest, 0);
3637 while (GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3638 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3639 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == SUBREG)
3640 new_i2_dest = XEXP (new_i2_dest, 0);
3642 if (REG_P (new_i3_dest)
3643 && REG_P (new_i2_dest)
3644 && REGNO (new_i3_dest) == REGNO (new_i2_dest)
3645 && REGNO (new_i2_dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
3646 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (new_i2_dest), 1);
3650 /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that
3651 helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers
3652 are set between I2 and I3. */
3653 if (insn_code_number < 0
3654 && (split = find_split_point (&newpat, i3, false)) != 0
3655 && (!HAVE_cc0 || REG_P (i2dest))
3656 /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register
3657 or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode.
3658 Make sure we don't change a hard register to have a mode that
3659 isn't valid for it, or change the number of registers. */
3660 && (GET_MODE (*split) == GET_MODE (i2dest)
3661 || GET_MODE (*split) == VOIDmode
3662 || can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2,
3663 GET_MODE (*split)))
3664 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3665 || ! use_crosses_set_p (*split, DF_INSN_LUID (i2)))
3666 /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by
3667 NEWPAT. */
3668 && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest, newpat))
3670 rtx newdest = i2dest;
3671 enum rtx_code split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3672 machine_mode split_mode = GET_MODE (*split);
3673 bool subst_done = false;
3674 newi2pat = NULL_RTX;
3676 i2scratch = true;
3678 /* *SPLIT may be part of I2SRC, so make sure we have the
3679 original expression around for later debug processing.
3680 We should not need I2SRC any more in other cases. */
3681 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
3682 i2src = copy_rtx (i2src);
3683 else
3684 i2src = NULL;
3686 /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already
3687 validated that we can do this. */
3688 if (GET_MODE (i2dest) != split_mode && split_mode != VOIDmode)
3690 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3691 newdest = gen_rtx_REG (split_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3692 else
3694 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], split_mode);
3695 newdest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3699 /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to
3700 an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence
3701 appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */
3702 if (split_code == MULT
3703 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*split, 1))
3704 && INTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)) > 0
3705 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)))) >= 0)
3707 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ASHIFT (split_mode,
3708 XEXP (*split, 0), GEN_INT (i)));
3709 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3710 anymore. */
3711 split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3714 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
3715 /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should
3716 be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */
3717 if (split_code == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3719 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
3720 /* Or as a SIGN_EXTEND if LOAD_EXTEND_OP says that that's
3721 what it really is. */
3722 if (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3723 == SIGN_EXTEND)
3724 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (split_mode,
3725 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3726 else
3727 #endif
3728 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (split_mode,
3729 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3731 #endif
3733 /* Attempt to split binary operators using arithmetic identities. */
3734 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (newpat))
3735 && split_mode == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat))
3736 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (newpat)))
3738 rtx setsrc = SET_SRC (newpat);
3739 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (setsrc);
3740 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (setsrc);
3741 rtx src_op0 = XEXP (setsrc, 0);
3742 rtx src_op1 = XEXP (setsrc, 1);
3744 /* Split "X = Y op Y" as "Z = Y; X = Z op Z". */
3745 if (rtx_equal_p (src_op0, src_op1))
3747 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newdest, src_op0);
3748 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3749 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3750 subst_done = true;
3752 /* Split "((P op Q) op R) op S" where op is PLUS or MULT. */
3753 else if ((code == PLUS || code == MULT)
3754 && GET_CODE (src_op0) == code
3755 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_op0, 0)) == code
3756 && (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
3757 || (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode)
3758 && flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)))
3760 rtx p = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 0);
3761 rtx q = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 1);
3762 rtx r = XEXP (src_op0, 1);
3763 rtx s = src_op1;
3765 /* Split both "((X op Y) op X) op Y" and
3766 "((X op Y) op Y) op X" as "T op T" where T is
3767 "X op Y". */
3768 if ((rtx_equal_p (p,r) && rtx_equal_p (q,s))
3769 || (rtx_equal_p (p,s) && rtx_equal_p (q,r)))
3771 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newdest,
3772 XEXP (src_op0, 0));
3773 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3774 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3775 subst_done = true;
3777 /* Split "((X op X) op Y) op Y)" as "T op T" where
3778 T is "X op Y". */
3779 else if (rtx_equal_p (p,q) && rtx_equal_p (r,s))
3781 rtx tmp = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, p, r);
3782 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newdest, tmp);
3783 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3784 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3785 subst_done = true;
3790 if (!subst_done)
3792 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, newdest, *split);
3793 SUBST (*split, newdest);
3796 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3798 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3799 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3800 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
3801 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3802 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
3804 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
3805 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
3807 undo_all ();
3808 return 0;
3812 /* If the split point was a MULT and we didn't have one before,
3813 don't use one now. */
3814 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && ! (split_code == MULT && ! have_mult))
3815 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3819 /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and
3820 then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case,
3821 we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location.
3822 We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register
3823 copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can
3824 eliminate the copy.
3826 We cannot do this if the destination of the first assignment is a
3827 condition code register or cc0. We eliminate this case by making sure
3828 the SET_DEST and SET_SRC have the same mode.
3830 We cannot do this if the destination of the second assignment is
3831 a register that we have already assumed is zero-extended. Similarly
3832 for a SUBREG of such a register. */
3834 else if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3835 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3836 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3837 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3838 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND
3839 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3840 == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3841 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3842 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3843 XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)), 0))
3844 && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3845 DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3846 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3847 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3848 && ! (temp_expr = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3849 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3850 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3851 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3852 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3853 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3854 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode))))
3855 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) == SUBREG
3856 && (temp_expr = SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))),
3857 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3858 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3859 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3860 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3861 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3862 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode)))))
3863 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3864 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3865 && ! find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3866 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3868 rtx ni2dest;
3870 newi2pat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3871 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0));
3872 newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3873 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3874 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)), ni2dest));
3875 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3877 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3878 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3880 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3881 swap_i2i3 = 1;
3884 /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent
3885 SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets
3886 as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two
3887 other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live.
3889 Also do this if we started with two insns and (at least) one of the
3890 resulting sets is a noop; this noop will be deleted later. */
3892 else if (insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3893 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3894 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3895 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3896 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3897 && (i1 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3898 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3899 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3900 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3901 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3902 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3903 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3904 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3905 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)),
3906 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))
3907 && ! (contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3908 && contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))))
3910 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3911 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3913 /* Normally, it doesn't matter which of the two is done first,
3914 but the one that references cc0 can't be the second, and
3915 one which uses any regs/memory set in between i2 and i3 can't
3916 be first. The PARALLEL might also have been pre-existing in i3,
3917 so we need to make sure that we won't wrongly hoist a SET to i2
3918 that would conflict with a death note present in there. */
3919 if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set1), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3920 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3921 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set1)))
3922 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3923 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3924 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1))))
3925 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set0))
3926 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set0 is a jump so that
3927 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3928 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set0) == pc_rtx)
3931 newi2pat = set1;
3932 newpat = set0;
3934 else if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set0), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3935 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3936 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set0)))
3937 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3938 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3939 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0))))
3940 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set1))
3941 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set1 is a jump so that
3942 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3943 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set1) == pc_rtx)
3946 newi2pat = set0;
3947 newpat = set1;
3949 else
3951 undo_all ();
3952 return 0;
3955 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3957 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3959 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3960 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3961 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
3963 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3964 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
3966 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
3967 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
3969 undo_all ();
3970 return 0;
3975 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3979 /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they
3980 were. */
3981 if ((insn_code_number < 0
3982 /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */
3983 && (! check_asm_operands (newpat) || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)))
3985 undo_all ();
3986 return 0;
3989 /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */
3990 if (undobuf.other_insn)
3992 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
3994 other_pat = PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn);
3995 other_code_number = recog_for_combine (&other_pat, undobuf.other_insn,
3996 &new_other_notes);
3998 if (other_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat))
4000 undo_all ();
4001 return 0;
4005 /* If I2 is the CC0 setter and I3 is the CC0 user then check whether
4006 they are adjacent to each other or not. */
4007 if (HAVE_cc0)
4009 rtx_insn *p = prev_nonnote_insn (i3);
4010 if (p && p != i2 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && newi2pat
4011 && sets_cc0_p (newi2pat))
4013 undo_all ();
4014 return 0;
4018 /* Only allow this combination if insn_rtx_costs reports that the
4019 replacement instructions are cheaper than the originals. */
4020 if (!combine_validate_cost (i0, i1, i2, i3, newpat, newi2pat, other_pat))
4022 undo_all ();
4023 return 0;
4026 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4028 struct undo *undo;
4030 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = undo->next)
4031 if (undo->kind == UNDO_MODE)
4033 rtx reg = *undo->where.r;
4034 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (reg);
4035 machine_mode old_mode = undo->old_contents.m;
4037 /* Temporarily revert mode back. */
4038 adjust_reg_mode (reg, old_mode);
4040 if (reg == i2dest && i2scratch)
4042 /* If we used i2dest as a scratch register with a
4043 different mode, substitute it for the original
4044 i2src while its original mode is temporarily
4045 restored, and then clear i2scratch so that we don't
4046 do it again later. */
4047 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, reg, i2src,
4048 this_basic_block);
4049 i2scratch = false;
4050 /* Put back the new mode. */
4051 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4053 else
4055 rtx tempreg = gen_raw_REG (old_mode, REGNO (reg));
4056 rtx_insn *first, *last;
4058 if (reg == i2dest)
4060 first = i2;
4061 last = last_combined_insn;
4063 else
4065 first = i3;
4066 last = undobuf.other_insn;
4067 gcc_assert (last);
4068 if (DF_INSN_LUID (last)
4069 < DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn))
4070 last = last_combined_insn;
4073 /* We're dealing with a reg that changed mode but not
4074 meaning, so we want to turn it into a subreg for
4075 the new mode. However, because of REG sharing and
4076 because its mode had already changed, we have to do
4077 it in two steps. First, replace any debug uses of
4078 reg, with its original mode temporarily restored,
4079 with this copy we have created; then, replace the
4080 copy with the SUBREG of the original shared reg,
4081 once again changed to the new mode. */
4082 propagate_for_debug (first, last, reg, tempreg,
4083 this_basic_block);
4084 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4085 propagate_for_debug (first, last, tempreg,
4086 lowpart_subreg (old_mode, reg, new_mode),
4087 this_basic_block);
4092 /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a
4093 change to the destination of I3. This requires us to
4094 do a few adjustments. */
4096 if (changed_i3_dest)
4098 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4099 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4102 /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and
4103 update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */
4105 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4107 rtx note, next;
4109 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn) = other_pat;
4111 /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_DEAD or REG_UNUSED,
4112 ensure that they are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate
4113 notes added by recog_for_combine. */
4114 for (note = REG_NOTES (undobuf.other_insn); note; note = next)
4116 next = XEXP (note, 1);
4118 if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
4119 && !reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4120 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)))
4121 ||(REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED
4122 && !reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4123 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn))))
4124 remove_note (undobuf.other_insn, note);
4127 distribute_notes (new_other_notes, undobuf.other_insn,
4128 undobuf.other_insn, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4129 NULL_RTX);
4132 if (swap_i2i3)
4134 rtx_insn *insn;
4135 struct insn_link *link;
4136 rtx ni2dest;
4138 /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is now
4139 I2's destination. This requires us to do a few adjustments. */
4140 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4141 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4143 /* We need a LOG_LINK from I3 to I2. But we used to have one,
4144 so we still will.
4146 However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have
4147 a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We must remove this link.
4148 The simplest way to remove the link is to point it at I1,
4149 which we know will be a NOTE. */
4151 /* newi2pat is usually a SET here; however, recog_for_combine might
4152 have added some clobbers. */
4153 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
4154 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, 0));
4155 else
4156 ni2dest = SET_DEST (newi2pat);
4158 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (i3);
4159 insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4160 || insn != BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb));
4161 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
4163 if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_referenced_p (ni2dest, PATTERN (insn)))
4165 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
4166 if (link->insn == i3)
4167 link->insn = i1;
4169 break;
4175 rtx i3notes, i2notes, i1notes = 0, i0notes = 0;
4176 struct insn_link *i3links, *i2links, *i1links = 0, *i0links = 0;
4177 rtx midnotes = 0;
4178 int from_luid;
4179 /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. newi2pat may be setting
4180 either i3dest or i2dest, so we must check it. */
4181 rtx elim_i2 = ((newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4182 || i2dest_in_i2src || i2dest_in_i1src || i2dest_in_i0src
4183 || !i2dest_killed
4184 ? 0 : i2dest);
4185 /* For i1, we need to compute both local elimination and global
4186 elimination information with respect to newi2pat because i1dest
4187 may be the same as i3dest, in which case newi2pat may be setting
4188 i1dest. Global information is used when distributing REG_DEAD
4189 note for i2 and i3, in which case it does matter if newi2pat sets
4190 i1dest or not.
4192 Local information is used when distributing REG_DEAD note for i1,
4193 in which case it doesn't matter if newi2pat sets i1dest or not.
4194 See PR62151, if we have four insns combination:
4195 i0: r0 <- i0src
4196 i1: r1 <- i1src (using r0)
4197 REG_DEAD (r0)
4198 i2: r0 <- i2src (using r1)
4199 i3: r3 <- i3src (using r0)
4200 ix: using r0
4201 From i1's point of view, r0 is eliminated, no matter if it is set
4202 by newi2pat or not. In other words, REG_DEAD info for r0 in i1
4203 should be discarded.
4205 Note local information only affects cases in forms like "I1->I2->I3",
4206 "I0->I1->I2->I3" or "I0&I1->I2, I2->I3". For other cases like
4207 "I0->I1, I1&I2->I3" or "I1&I2->I3", newi2pat won't set i1dest or
4208 i0dest anyway. */
4209 rtx local_elim_i1 = (i1 == 0 || i1dest_in_i1src || i1dest_in_i0src
4210 || !i1dest_killed
4211 ? 0 : i1dest);
4212 rtx elim_i1 = (local_elim_i1 == 0
4213 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4214 ? 0 : i1dest);
4215 /* Same case as i1. */
4216 rtx local_elim_i0 = (i0 == 0 || i0dest_in_i0src || !i0dest_killed
4217 ? 0 : i0dest);
4218 rtx elim_i0 = (local_elim_i0 == 0
4219 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4220 ? 0 : i0dest);
4222 /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and
4223 clear them. */
4224 i3notes = REG_NOTES (i3), i3links = LOG_LINKS (i3);
4225 i2notes = REG_NOTES (i2), i2links = LOG_LINKS (i2);
4226 if (i1)
4227 i1notes = REG_NOTES (i1), i1links = LOG_LINKS (i1);
4228 if (i0)
4229 i0notes = REG_NOTES (i0), i0links = LOG_LINKS (i0);
4231 /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but
4232 occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first
4233 resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */
4235 reset_used_flags (i3notes);
4236 reset_used_flags (i2notes);
4237 reset_used_flags (i1notes);
4238 reset_used_flags (i0notes);
4239 reset_used_flags (newpat);
4240 reset_used_flags (newi2pat);
4241 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4242 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4244 i3notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes);
4245 i2notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes);
4246 i1notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes);
4247 i0notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i0notes);
4248 newpat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat);
4249 newi2pat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat);
4250 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4251 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4253 INSN_CODE (i3) = insn_code_number;
4254 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4256 if (CALL_P (i3) && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3))
4258 rtx call_usage = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3);
4260 reset_used_flags (call_usage);
4261 call_usage = copy_rtx (call_usage);
4263 if (substed_i2)
4265 /* I2SRC must still be meaningful at this point. Some splitting
4266 operations can invalidate I2SRC, but those operations do not
4267 apply to calls. */
4268 gcc_assert (i2src);
4269 replace_rtx (call_usage, i2dest, i2src);
4272 if (substed_i1)
4273 replace_rtx (call_usage, i1dest, i1src);
4274 if (substed_i0)
4275 replace_rtx (call_usage, i0dest, i0src);
4277 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3) = call_usage;
4280 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4281 INSN_CODE (undobuf.other_insn) = other_code_number;
4283 /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and
4284 we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination
4285 of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later
4286 in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare.
4288 Also, in this case, we must pretend that all REG_NOTEs for I2
4289 actually came from I3, so that REG_UNUSED notes from I2 will be
4290 properly handled. */
4292 if (i3_subst_into_i2)
4294 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0); i++)
4295 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == SET
4296 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
4297 && REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)))
4298 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) != i2dest
4299 && ! find_reg_note (i2, REG_UNUSED,
4300 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i))))
4301 for (temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (i2);
4302 temp_insn
4303 && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4304 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block) != temp_insn);
4305 temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (temp_insn))
4306 if (temp_insn != i3 && INSN_P (temp_insn))
4307 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, temp_insn)
4308 if (link->insn == i2)
4309 link->insn = i3;
4311 if (i3notes)
4313 rtx link = i3notes;
4314 while (XEXP (link, 1))
4315 link = XEXP (link, 1);
4316 XEXP (link, 1) = i2notes;
4318 else
4319 i3notes = i2notes;
4320 i2notes = 0;
4323 LOG_LINKS (i3) = NULL;
4324 REG_NOTES (i3) = 0;
4325 LOG_LINKS (i2) = NULL;
4326 REG_NOTES (i2) = 0;
4328 if (newi2pat)
4330 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2scratch)
4331 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4332 this_basic_block);
4333 INSN_CODE (i2) = i2_code_number;
4334 PATTERN (i2) = newi2pat;
4336 else
4338 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2src)
4339 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4340 this_basic_block);
4341 SET_INSN_DELETED (i2);
4344 if (i1)
4346 LOG_LINKS (i1) = NULL;
4347 REG_NOTES (i1) = 0;
4348 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4349 propagate_for_debug (i1, last_combined_insn, i1dest, i1src,
4350 this_basic_block);
4351 SET_INSN_DELETED (i1);
4354 if (i0)
4356 LOG_LINKS (i0) = NULL;
4357 REG_NOTES (i0) = 0;
4358 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4359 propagate_for_debug (i0, last_combined_insn, i0dest, i0src,
4360 this_basic_block);
4361 SET_INSN_DELETED (i0);
4364 /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or
4365 I2 and used to die in a previous insn. If we built two new
4366 patterns, move from I1 to I2 then I2 to I3 so that we get the
4367 proper movement on registers that I2 modifies. */
4369 if (i0)
4370 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
4371 else if (i1)
4372 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
4373 else
4374 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
4375 if (newi2pat)
4376 move_deaths (newi2pat, NULL_RTX, from_luid, i2, &midnotes);
4377 move_deaths (newpat, newi2pat, from_luid, i3, &midnotes);
4379 /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */
4380 if (i3notes)
4381 distribute_notes (i3notes, i3, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4382 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4383 if (i2notes)
4384 distribute_notes (i2notes, i2, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4385 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4386 if (i1notes)
4387 distribute_notes (i1notes, i1, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4388 elim_i2, local_elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4389 if (i0notes)
4390 distribute_notes (i0notes, i0, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4391 elim_i2, elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4392 if (midnotes)
4393 distribute_notes (midnotes, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4394 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4396 /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We
4397 know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn,
4398 so we always pass it as i3. */
4400 if (newi2pat && new_i2_notes)
4401 distribute_notes (new_i2_notes, i2, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4402 NULL_RTX);
4404 if (new_i3_notes)
4405 distribute_notes (new_i3_notes, i3, i3, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4406 NULL_RTX);
4408 /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to
4409 put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets
4410 I3DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If we passed I3
4411 in that case, it might delete I2. Similarly for I2 and I1.
4412 Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If
4413 we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */
4415 if (i3dest_killed)
4417 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i3dest_killed, NULL_RTX);
4418 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i3dest_killed, newi2pat))
4419 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, elim_i2,
4420 elim_i1, elim_i0);
4421 else
4422 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4423 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4426 if (i2dest_in_i2src)
4428 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i2dest, NULL_RTX);
4429 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4430 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4431 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4432 else
4433 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4434 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4437 if (i1dest_in_i1src)
4439 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i1dest, NULL_RTX);
4440 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4441 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4442 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4443 else
4444 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4445 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4448 if (i0dest_in_i0src)
4450 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i0dest, NULL_RTX);
4451 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4452 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4453 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4454 else
4455 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4456 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4459 distribute_links (i3links);
4460 distribute_links (i2links);
4461 distribute_links (i1links);
4462 distribute_links (i0links);
4464 if (REG_P (i2dest))
4466 struct insn_link *link;
4467 rtx_insn *i2_insn = 0;
4468 rtx i2_val = 0, set;
4470 /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and
4471 this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of
4472 I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does,
4473 that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update
4474 this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old
4475 contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing
4476 will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */
4477 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4478 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4479 && rtx_equal_p (i2dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4480 i2_insn = link->insn, i2_val = SET_SRC (set);
4482 record_value_for_reg (i2dest, i2_insn, i2_val);
4484 /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3,
4485 zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */
4486 if (! added_sets_2
4487 && (newi2pat == 0 || ! reg_mentioned_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4488 && ! i2dest_in_i2src
4489 && REGNO (i2dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4490 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i2dest), -1);
4493 if (i1 && REG_P (i1dest))
4495 struct insn_link *link;
4496 rtx_insn *i1_insn = 0;
4497 rtx i1_val = 0, set;
4499 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4500 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4501 && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4502 i1_insn = link->insn, i1_val = SET_SRC (set);
4504 record_value_for_reg (i1dest, i1_insn, i1_val);
4506 if (! added_sets_1
4507 && ! i1dest_in_i1src
4508 && REGNO (i1dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4509 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i1dest), -1);
4512 if (i0 && REG_P (i0dest))
4514 struct insn_link *link;
4515 rtx_insn *i0_insn = 0;
4516 rtx i0_val = 0, set;
4518 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4519 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4520 && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4521 i0_insn = link->insn, i0_val = SET_SRC (set);
4523 record_value_for_reg (i0dest, i0_insn, i0_val);
4525 if (! added_sets_0
4526 && ! i0dest_in_i0src
4527 && REGNO (i0dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4528 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i0dest), -1);
4531 /* Update reg_stat[].nonzero_bits et al for any changes that may have
4532 been made to this insn. The order is important, because newi2pat
4533 can affect nonzero_bits of newpat. */
4534 if (newi2pat)
4535 note_stores (newi2pat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4536 note_stores (newpat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4539 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX)
4541 if (dump_file)
4543 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying other_insn ");
4544 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, undobuf.other_insn);
4546 df_insn_rescan (undobuf.other_insn);
4549 if (i0 && !(NOTE_P (i0) && (NOTE_KIND (i0) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4551 if (dump_file)
4553 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i0 ");
4554 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i0);
4556 df_insn_rescan (i0);
4559 if (i1 && !(NOTE_P (i1) && (NOTE_KIND (i1) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4561 if (dump_file)
4563 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i1 ");
4564 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i1);
4566 df_insn_rescan (i1);
4569 if (i2 && !(NOTE_P (i2) && (NOTE_KIND (i2) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4571 if (dump_file)
4573 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i2 ");
4574 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i2);
4576 df_insn_rescan (i2);
4579 if (i3 && !(NOTE_P (i3) && (NOTE_KIND (i3) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4581 if (dump_file)
4583 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i3 ");
4584 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i3);
4586 df_insn_rescan (i3);
4589 /* Set new_direct_jump_p if a new return or simple jump instruction
4590 has been created. Adjust the CFG accordingly. */
4591 if (returnjump_p (i3) || any_uncondjump_p (i3))
4593 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4594 mark_jump_label (PATTERN (i3), i3, 0);
4595 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4598 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4599 && (returnjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)
4600 || any_uncondjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)))
4602 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4603 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4606 /* A noop might also need cleaning up of CFG, if it comes from the
4607 simplification of a jump. */
4608 if (JUMP_P (i3)
4609 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
4610 && SET_SRC (newpat) == pc_rtx
4611 && SET_DEST (newpat) == pc_rtx)
4613 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4614 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4617 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4618 && JUMP_P (undobuf.other_insn)
4619 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == SET
4620 && SET_SRC (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx
4621 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx)
4623 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4624 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4627 combine_successes++;
4628 undo_commit ();
4630 if (added_links_insn
4631 && (newi2pat == 0 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
4632 && DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i3))
4633 return added_links_insn;
4634 else
4635 return newi2pat ? i2 : i3;
4638 /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */
4640 static void
4641 undo_all (void)
4643 struct undo *undo, *next;
4645 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = next)
4647 next = undo->next;
4648 switch (undo->kind)
4650 case UNDO_RTX:
4651 *undo->where.r = undo->old_contents.r;
4652 break;
4653 case UNDO_INT:
4654 *undo->where.i = undo->old_contents.i;
4655 break;
4656 case UNDO_MODE:
4657 adjust_reg_mode (*undo->where.r, undo->old_contents.m);
4658 break;
4659 case UNDO_LINKS:
4660 *undo->where.l = undo->old_contents.l;
4661 break;
4662 default:
4663 gcc_unreachable ();
4666 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4667 undobuf.frees = undo;
4670 undobuf.undos = 0;
4673 /* We've committed to accepting the changes we made. Move all
4674 of the undos to the free list. */
4676 static void
4677 undo_commit (void)
4679 struct undo *undo, *next;
4681 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = next)
4683 next = undo->next;
4684 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4685 undobuf.frees = undo;
4687 undobuf.undos = 0;
4690 /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself,
4691 where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will
4692 be inside INSN.
4694 try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into
4695 two insns. */
4697 static rtx *
4698 find_split_point (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, bool set_src)
4700 rtx x = *loc;
4701 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
4702 rtx *split;
4703 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = 0;
4704 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0;
4705 int unsignedp = 0;
4706 rtx inner = NULL_RTX;
4708 /* First special-case some codes. */
4709 switch (code)
4711 case SUBREG:
4712 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
4713 /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split
4714 point. */
4715 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
4716 return loc;
4717 #endif
4718 return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x), insn, false);
4720 case MEM:
4721 #ifdef HAVE_lo_sum
4722 /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it
4723 using LO_SUM and HIGH. */
4724 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST
4725 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4727 machine_mode address_mode = get_address_mode (x);
4729 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
4730 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (address_mode,
4731 gen_rtx_HIGH (address_mode, XEXP (x, 0)),
4732 XEXP (x, 0)));
4733 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4735 #endif
4737 /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the
4738 address is not valid, perhaps will can split it up using
4739 the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use
4740 the first pseudo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder;
4741 it will not remain in the result. */
4742 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4743 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
4744 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4745 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4747 rtx reg = regno_reg_rtx[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
4748 rtx_insn *seq = combine_split_insns (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, reg,
4749 XEXP (x, 0)),
4750 subst_insn);
4752 /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our
4753 placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address,
4754 we can make put both sources together and make a split point
4755 in the middle. */
4757 if (seq
4758 && NEXT_INSN (seq) != NULL_RTX
4759 && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (seq)) == NULL_RTX
4760 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (seq)
4761 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SET
4762 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (seq)) == reg
4763 && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg,
4764 SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq)))
4765 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (NEXT_INSN (seq))
4766 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == SET
4767 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == reg
4768 && memory_address_addr_space_p
4769 (GET_MODE (x), SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))),
4770 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4772 rtx src1 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq));
4773 rtx src2 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq)));
4775 /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can
4776 find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our
4777 split point and we can replace this address with SRC2.
4778 Just try two obvious places. */
4780 src2 = replace_rtx (src2, reg, src1);
4781 split = 0;
4782 if (XEXP (src2, 0) == src1)
4783 split = &XEXP (src2, 0);
4784 else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2, 0)))[0] == 'e'
4785 && XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0) == src1)
4786 split = &XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0);
4788 if (split)
4790 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), src2);
4791 return split;
4795 /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and
4796 needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there.
4797 This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST
4798 and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */
4800 else if (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4801 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4802 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4803 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4806 /* If we have a PLUS whose first operand is complex, try computing it
4807 separately by making a split there. */
4808 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4809 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4810 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x))
4811 && ! OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4812 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4813 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4814 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4815 break;
4817 case SET:
4818 /* If SET_DEST is CC0 and SET_SRC is not an operand, a COMPARE, or a
4819 ZERO_EXTRACT, the most likely reason why this doesn't match is that
4820 we need to put the operand into a register. So split at that
4821 point. */
4823 if (SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx
4824 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != COMPARE
4825 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4826 && !OBJECT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4827 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG
4828 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))))
4829 return &SET_SRC (x);
4831 /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */
4832 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4833 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4834 return split;
4836 /* See if we can split SET_DEST as it stands. */
4837 split = find_split_point (&SET_DEST (x), insn, false);
4838 if (split && split != &SET_DEST (x))
4839 return split;
4841 /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If
4842 so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */
4843 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4844 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4845 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4846 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2))
4847 && CONST_INT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4848 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4849 + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2)))
4850 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))))
4851 && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4853 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2));
4854 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
4855 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT src = INTVAL (SET_SRC (x));
4856 rtx dest = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
4857 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (dest);
4858 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
4859 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1;
4860 rtx or_mask;
4862 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4863 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len - pos;
4865 or_mask = gen_int_mode (src << pos, mode);
4866 if (src == mask)
4867 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4868 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, dest, or_mask));
4869 else
4871 rtx negmask = gen_int_mode (~(mask << pos), mode);
4872 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4873 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode,
4874 simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode,
4875 dest, negmask),
4876 or_mask));
4879 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), dest);
4881 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4882 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4883 return split;
4886 /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two.
4887 If so, try to split that. */
4888 code = GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x));
4890 switch (code)
4892 case AND:
4893 /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single
4894 bit and the result is only being used in a context where we
4895 need to know if it is zero or nonzero, replace it with a bit
4896 extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might
4897 have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were
4898 not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make,
4899 this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will
4900 be better. */
4902 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
4903 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
4904 && (pos = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)))) >= 7
4905 && REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
4906 && (split = find_single_use (SET_DEST (x), insn, NULL)) != 0
4907 && (GET_CODE (*split) == EQ || GET_CODE (*split) == NE)
4908 && XEXP (*split, 0) == SET_DEST (x)
4909 && XEXP (*split, 1) == const0_rtx)
4911 rtx extraction = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)),
4912 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4913 pos, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 0);
4914 if (extraction != 0)
4916 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), extraction);
4917 return find_split_point (loc, insn, false);
4920 break;
4922 case NE:
4923 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, this is (NE X 0) and only one bit of X
4924 is known to be on, this can be converted into a NEG of a shift. */
4925 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 && XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1) == const0_rtx
4926 && GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)) == GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
4927 && 1 <= (pos = exact_log2
4928 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4929 GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
4931 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0));
4933 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4934 gen_rtx_NEG (mode,
4935 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode,
4936 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4937 GEN_INT (pos))));
4939 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4940 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4941 return split;
4943 break;
4945 case SIGN_EXTEND:
4946 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
4948 /* We can't optimize if either mode is a partial integer
4949 mode as we don't know how many bits are significant
4950 in those modes. */
4951 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner)) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
4952 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
4953 break;
4955 pos = 0;
4956 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
4957 unsignedp = 0;
4958 break;
4960 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4961 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4962 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
4963 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)))
4965 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
4966 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1));
4967 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2));
4969 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4970 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len - pos;
4971 unsignedp = (code == ZERO_EXTRACT);
4973 break;
4975 default:
4976 break;
4979 if (len && pos >= 0
4980 && pos + len <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
4982 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x));
4984 /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an
4985 AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the
4986 constant might be too large. We assume here that we can
4987 always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is
4988 true for every current RISC. */
4990 if (unsignedp && len <= 8)
4992 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
4993 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1;
4994 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4995 gen_rtx_AND (mode,
4996 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT
4997 (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
4998 GEN_INT (pos)),
4999 gen_int_mode (mask, mode)));
5001 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5002 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5003 return split;
5005 else
5007 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5008 gen_rtx_fmt_ee
5009 (unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT, mode,
5010 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode,
5011 gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
5012 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
5013 - len - pos)),
5014 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len)));
5016 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5017 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5018 return split;
5022 /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second
5023 operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence
5024 could be used as a split point. */
5025 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x))
5026 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
5027 && (OBJECT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
5028 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == SUBREG
5029 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
5030 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1);
5032 /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand
5033 not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a
5034 register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this
5035 because if the first operand were another operation, we would have
5036 already found it as a split point. */
5037 if ((BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x)) || UNARY_P (SET_SRC (x)))
5038 && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), VOIDmode))
5039 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
5041 return 0;
5043 case AND:
5044 case IOR:
5045 /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR,
5046 it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it.
5047 Similarly for IOR. */
5048 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5050 SUBST (*loc,
5051 gen_rtx_NOT (GET_MODE (x),
5052 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code == IOR ? AND : IOR,
5053 GET_MODE (x),
5054 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5055 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0))));
5056 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5059 /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the
5060 second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the
5061 other operand first. */
5062 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5064 rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5065 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5066 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem);
5068 break;
5070 case PLUS:
5071 case MINUS:
5072 /* Canonicalization can produce (minus A (mult B C)), where C is a
5073 constant. It may be better to try splitting (plus (mult B -C) A)
5074 instead if this isn't a multiply by a power of two. */
5075 if (set_src && code == MINUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT
5076 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT
5077 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))) < 0)
5079 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5080 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_int = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1));
5081 HOST_WIDE_INT other_int = trunc_int_for_mode (-this_int, mode);
5082 SUBST (*loc, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode,
5083 gen_rtx_MULT (mode,
5084 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0),
5085 gen_int_mode (other_int,
5086 mode)),
5087 XEXP (x, 0)));
5088 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5091 /* Split at a multiply-accumulate instruction. However if this is
5092 the SET_SRC, we likely do not have such an instruction and it's
5093 worthless to try this split. */
5094 if (!set_src && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT)
5095 return loc;
5097 default:
5098 break;
5101 /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */
5102 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5104 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS: /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */
5105 case RTX_TERNARY:
5106 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 2), insn, false);
5107 if (split)
5108 return split;
5109 /* ... fall through ... */
5110 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5111 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5112 case RTX_COMPARE:
5113 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5114 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 1), insn, false);
5115 if (split)
5116 return split;
5117 /* ... fall through ... */
5118 case RTX_UNARY:
5119 /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not
5120 an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */
5121 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND)
5122 return &XEXP (x, 0);
5124 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 0), insn, false);
5125 if (split)
5126 return split;
5127 return loc;
5129 default:
5130 /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */
5131 return 0;
5135 /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result.
5136 The result is TO if X is FROM;
5137 otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified.
5138 If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that
5139 undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state.
5141 If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo,
5142 the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid.
5143 The changes already made can still be undone.
5144 undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that
5145 the caller can tell whether the result is valid.
5147 `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced.
5149 IN_DEST is nonzero if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET.
5151 IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level of a condition.
5153 UNIQUE_COPY is nonzero if each substitution must be unique. We do this
5154 by copying if `n_occurrences' is nonzero. */
5156 static rtx
5157 subst (rtx x, rtx from, rtx to, int in_dest, int in_cond, int unique_copy)
5159 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5160 machine_mode op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5161 const char *fmt;
5162 int len, i;
5163 rtx new_rtx;
5165 /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared
5166 RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number
5167 and mode. */
5169 #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \
5170 ((X) == (Y) \
5171 || (REG_P (X) && REG_P (Y) \
5172 && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y)))
5174 /* Do not substitute into clobbers of regs -- this will never result in
5175 valid RTL. */
5176 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER && REG_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5177 return x;
5179 if (! in_dest && COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, from))
5181 n_occurrences++;
5182 return (unique_copy && n_occurrences > 1 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5185 /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they
5186 will not have been seen as equal above. However, the log links code
5187 will make a LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we
5188 will try to rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds,
5189 we will delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect.
5191 So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */
5192 if (! in_dest && code == REG && REG_P (from)
5193 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, from))
5194 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
5196 /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both
5197 of which may contain things that can be combined. */
5198 if (code != MEM && code != LO_SUM && OBJECT_P (x))
5199 return x;
5201 /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn.
5202 Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO.
5203 Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst',
5204 the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were
5205 to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a
5206 self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */
5207 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, to))
5208 return to;
5210 /* Parallel asm_operands need special attention because all of the
5211 inputs are shared across the arms. Furthermore, unsharing the
5212 rtl results in recognition failures. Failure to handle this case
5213 specially can result in circular rtl.
5215 Solve this by doing a normal pass across the first entry of the
5216 parallel, and only processing the SET_DESTs of the subsequent
5217 entries. Ug. */
5219 if (code == PARALLEL
5220 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0)) == SET
5221 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
5223 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5225 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5226 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5227 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5228 return new_rtx;
5230 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), new_rtx);
5232 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 1; i--)
5234 rtx dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i));
5236 if (!REG_P (dest)
5237 && GET_CODE (dest) != CC0
5238 && GET_CODE (dest) != PC)
5240 new_rtx = subst (dest, from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5242 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5243 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5244 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5245 return new_rtx;
5247 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i)), new_rtx);
5251 else
5253 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
5254 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5256 /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register, CC0,
5257 or PC, so set up to skip this common case. All other cases
5258 where we want to suppress replacing something inside a
5259 SET_SRC are handled via the IN_DEST operand. */
5260 if (code == SET
5261 && (REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
5262 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == CC0
5263 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == PC))
5264 fmt = "ie";
5266 /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a
5267 constant. */
5268 if (fmt[0] == 'e')
5269 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5271 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
5273 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5275 int j;
5276 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
5278 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from))
5280 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences
5281 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5282 n_occurrences++;
5284 else
5286 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from, to, 0, 0,
5287 unique_copy);
5289 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing
5290 fails. */
5291 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5292 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5293 return new_rtx;
5296 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
5299 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5301 /* If this is a register being set, ignore it. */
5302 new_rtx = XEXP (x, i);
5303 if (in_dest
5304 && i == 0
5305 && (((code == SUBREG || code == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5306 && REG_P (new_rtx))
5307 || code == STRICT_LOW_PART))
5310 else if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x, i), from))
5312 /* In general, don't install a subreg involving two
5313 modes not tieable. It can worsen register
5314 allocation, and can even make invalid reload
5315 insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied
5316 from in the outside mode, and that may be invalid
5317 if it is an fp reg copied in integer mode.
5319 We allow two exceptions to this: It is valid if
5320 it is inside another SUBREG and the mode of that
5321 SUBREG and the mode of the inside of TO is
5322 tieable and it is valid if X is a SET that copies
5323 FROM to CC0. */
5325 if (GET_CODE (to) == SUBREG
5326 && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (to),
5327 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to)))
5328 && ! (code == SUBREG
5329 && MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x),
5330 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to))))
5331 #if HAVE_cc0
5332 && ! (code == SET && i == 1 && XEXP (x, 0) == cc0_rtx)
5333 #endif
5335 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5337 if (code == SUBREG
5338 && REG_P (to)
5339 && REGNO (to) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5340 && simplify_subreg_regno (REGNO (to), GET_MODE (to),
5341 SUBREG_BYTE (x),
5342 GET_MODE (x)) < 0)
5343 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5345 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5346 n_occurrences++;
5348 else
5349 /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we
5350 have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to
5351 simplify the address. We assume here that things that
5352 are actually part of the destination have their inner
5353 parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG,
5354 STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only
5355 things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a
5356 SET_DEST. */
5357 new_rtx = subst (XEXP (x, i), from, to,
5358 (((in_dest
5359 && (code == SUBREG || code == STRICT_LOW_PART
5360 || code == ZERO_EXTRACT))
5361 || code == SET)
5362 && i == 0),
5363 code == IF_THEN_ELSE && i == 0,
5364 unique_copy);
5366 /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination,
5367 indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than
5368 an expression containing it. This will speed things up as
5369 well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered
5370 to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */
5372 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5373 return new_rtx;
5375 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
5377 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5379 x = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), new_rtx,
5380 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
5381 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5382 if (! x)
5383 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5385 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx)
5386 && GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
5388 x = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
5389 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
5390 gcc_assert (x);
5392 else
5393 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
5398 /* Check if we are loading something from the constant pool via float
5399 extension; in this case we would undo compress_float_constant
5400 optimization and degenerate constant load to an immediate value. */
5401 if (GET_CODE (x) == FLOAT_EXTEND
5402 && MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5403 && MEM_READONLY_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5405 rtx tmp = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
5406 if (x != tmp)
5407 return x;
5410 /* Try to simplify X. If the simplification changed the code, it is likely
5411 that further simplification will help, so loop, but limit the number
5412 of repetitions that will be performed. */
5414 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
5416 /* If X is sufficiently simple, don't bother trying to do anything
5417 with it. */
5418 if (code != CONST_INT && code != REG && code != CLOBBER)
5419 x = combine_simplify_rtx (x, op0_mode, in_dest, in_cond);
5421 if (GET_CODE (x) == code)
5422 break;
5424 code = GET_CODE (x);
5426 /* We no longer know the original mode of operand 0 since we
5427 have changed the form of X) */
5428 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5431 return x;
5434 /* Simplify X, a piece of RTL. We just operate on the expression at the
5435 outer level; call `subst' to simplify recursively. Return the new
5436 expression.
5438 OP0_MODE is the original mode of XEXP (x, 0). IN_DEST is nonzero
5439 if we are inside a SET_DEST. IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level
5440 of a condition. */
5442 static rtx
5443 combine_simplify_rtx (rtx x, machine_mode op0_mode, int in_dest,
5444 int in_cond)
5446 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5447 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5448 rtx temp;
5449 int i;
5451 /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex
5452 expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */
5453 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x)
5454 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5456 temp = XEXP (x, 0);
5457 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5458 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), temp);
5461 /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try
5462 applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies
5463 things. Check for cases where both arms are testing the same
5464 condition.
5466 Don't do anything if all operands are very simple. */
5468 if ((BINARY_P (x)
5469 && ((!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5470 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5471 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))
5472 || (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5473 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SUBREG
5474 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 1)))))))
5475 || (UNARY_P (x)
5476 && (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5477 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5478 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))))
5480 rtx cond, true_rtx, false_rtx;
5482 cond = if_then_else_cond (x, &true_rtx, &false_rtx);
5483 if (cond != 0
5484 /* If everything is a comparison, what we have is highly unlikely
5485 to be simpler, so don't use it. */
5486 && ! (COMPARISON_P (x)
5487 && (COMPARISON_P (true_rtx) || COMPARISON_P (false_rtx))))
5489 rtx cop1 = const0_rtx;
5490 enum rtx_code cond_code = simplify_comparison (NE, &cond, &cop1);
5492 if (cond_code == NE && COMPARISON_P (cond))
5493 return x;
5495 /* Simplify the alternative arms; this may collapse the true and
5496 false arms to store-flag values. Be careful to use copy_rtx
5497 here since true_rtx or false_rtx might share RTL with x as a
5498 result of the if_then_else_cond call above. */
5499 true_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (true_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5500 false_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (false_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5502 /* If true_rtx and false_rtx are not general_operands, an if_then_else
5503 is unlikely to be simpler. */
5504 if (general_operand (true_rtx, VOIDmode)
5505 && general_operand (false_rtx, VOIDmode))
5507 enum rtx_code reversed;
5509 /* Restarting if we generate a store-flag expression will cause
5510 us to loop. Just drop through in this case. */
5512 /* If the result values are STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero, we can
5513 just make the comparison operation. */
5514 if (true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5515 x = simplify_gen_relational (cond_code, mode, VOIDmode,
5516 cond, cop1);
5517 else if (true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
5518 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5519 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5520 != UNKNOWN))
5521 x = simplify_gen_relational (reversed, mode, VOIDmode,
5522 cond, cop1);
5524 /* Likewise, we can make the negate of a comparison operation
5525 if the result values are - STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero. */
5526 else if (CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
5527 && INTVAL (true_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5528 && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5529 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5530 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5531 mode, VOIDmode,
5532 cond, cop1),
5533 mode);
5534 else if (CONST_INT_P (false_rtx)
5535 && INTVAL (false_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5536 && true_rtx == const0_rtx
5537 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5538 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5539 != UNKNOWN))
5540 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5541 simplify_gen_relational (reversed,
5542 mode, VOIDmode,
5543 cond, cop1),
5544 mode);
5545 else
5546 return gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (mode,
5547 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5548 mode,
5549 VOIDmode,
5550 cond,
5551 cop1),
5552 true_rtx, false_rtx);
5554 code = GET_CODE (x);
5555 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5560 /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't
5561 present before. */
5562 temp = 0;
5563 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5565 case RTX_UNARY:
5566 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5567 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5568 temp = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), op0_mode);
5569 break;
5570 case RTX_COMPARE:
5571 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5573 machine_mode cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5574 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5576 cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1));
5577 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5578 cmp_mode = op0_mode;
5580 temp = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, cmp_mode,
5581 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5583 break;
5584 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5585 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5586 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5587 break;
5588 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
5589 case RTX_TERNARY:
5590 temp = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5591 XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2));
5592 break;
5593 default:
5594 break;
5597 if (temp)
5599 x = temp;
5600 code = GET_CODE (temp);
5601 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5602 mode = GET_MODE (temp);
5605 /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */
5606 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS
5607 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR)
5609 x = apply_distributive_law (x);
5610 code = GET_CODE (x);
5611 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5614 /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we
5615 can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or
5616 if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a). */
5617 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS || code == MULT || code == DIV
5618 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR
5619 || code == SMAX || code == SMIN || code == UMAX || code == UMIN)
5620 && ((INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode) && code != DIV)
5621 || (flag_associative_math && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))))
5623 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == code)
5625 rtx other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5626 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5627 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5628 rtx inner;
5630 /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second
5631 one if this is a commutative operation. */
5632 if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0) && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5634 rtx tem = inner_op0;
5635 inner_op0 = inner_op1;
5636 inner_op1 = tem;
5638 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code == MINUS ? PLUS
5639 : code == DIV ? MULT
5640 : code,
5641 mode, inner_op0, inner_op1);
5643 /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one
5644 didn't simplify. */
5645 if (inner == 0 && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5647 other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5648 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5649 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5650 XEXP (x, 1));
5653 if (inner)
5654 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, other, inner);
5658 /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */
5659 switch (code)
5661 case MEM:
5662 /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case
5663 address-recognizing predicates are called later. */
5664 temp = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), MEM);
5665 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), temp);
5666 break;
5668 case SUBREG:
5669 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5670 op0_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
5672 /* See if this can be moved to simplify_subreg. */
5673 if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5674 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5675 /* Don't call gen_lowpart if the inner mode
5676 is VOIDmode and we cannot simplify it, as SUBREG without
5677 inner mode is invalid. */
5678 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode
5679 || gen_lowpart_common (mode, SUBREG_REG (x))))
5680 return gen_lowpart (mode, SUBREG_REG (x));
5682 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) == MODE_CC)
5683 break;
5685 rtx temp;
5686 temp = simplify_subreg (mode, SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode,
5687 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5688 if (temp)
5689 return temp;
5691 /* If op is known to have all lower bits zero, the result is zero. */
5692 if (!in_dest
5693 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)
5694 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5695 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op0_mode)
5696 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5697 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5698 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode)
5699 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)
5700 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
5703 /* Don't change the mode of the MEM if that would change the meaning
5704 of the address. */
5705 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5706 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5707 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (x), 0),
5708 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
5709 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5711 /* Note that we cannot do any narrowing for non-constants since
5712 we might have been counting on using the fact that some bits were
5713 zero. We now do this in the SET. */
5715 break;
5717 case NEG:
5718 temp = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0));
5720 /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be
5721 replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert
5722 (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */
5724 if (GET_CODE (temp) == ASHIFTRT
5725 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (temp, 1))
5726 && INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1)
5727 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (temp, 0),
5728 INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)));
5730 /* If X has only a single bit that might be nonzero, say, bit I, convert
5731 (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of
5732 MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to
5733 (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register
5734 or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more
5735 complex if it was just a register. */
5737 if (!REG_P (temp)
5738 && ! (GET_CODE (temp) == SUBREG
5739 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (temp)))
5740 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (temp, mode))) >= 0)
5742 rtx temp1 = simplify_shift_const
5743 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5744 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, temp,
5745 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i),
5746 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
5748 /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we
5749 haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise,
5750 we are better off with TEMP1. */
5751 if (GET_CODE (temp1) != ASHIFTRT
5752 || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1, 0)) != ASHIFT
5753 || XEXP (XEXP (temp1, 0), 0) != temp)
5754 return temp1;
5756 break;
5758 case TRUNCATE:
5759 /* We can't handle truncation to a partial integer mode here
5760 because we don't know the real bitsize of the partial
5761 integer mode. */
5762 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
5763 break;
5765 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
5766 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
5767 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
5768 GET_MODE_MASK (mode), 0));
5770 /* We can truncate a constant value and return it. */
5771 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5772 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)), mode);
5774 /* Similarly to what we do in simplify-rtx.c, a truncate of a register
5775 whose value is a comparison can be replaced with a subreg if
5776 STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. */
5777 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5778 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
5779 && (temp = get_last_value (XEXP (x, 0)))
5780 && COMPARISON_P (temp))
5781 return gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
5782 break;
5784 case CONST:
5785 /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than
5786 returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a
5787 REG_EQUAL note. */
5788 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST)
5789 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
5790 break;
5792 #ifdef HAVE_lo_sum
5793 case LO_SUM:
5794 /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we
5795 can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up
5796 again if it doesn't match. */
5797 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == HIGH
5798 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5799 return XEXP (x, 1);
5800 break;
5801 #endif
5803 case PLUS:
5804 /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>)
5805 when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a
5806 bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a
5807 sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend and the two
5808 <c>, -<c> constants may be reversed. */
5809 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
5810 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5811 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5812 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5813 && ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))) >= 0
5814 || (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0)
5815 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5816 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == AND
5817 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5818 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5819 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (i + 1)) - 1))
5820 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5821 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0)))
5822 == (unsigned int) i + 1))))
5823 return simplify_shift_const
5824 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5825 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5826 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0),
5827 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1)),
5828 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1));
5830 /* If only the low-order bit of X is possibly nonzero, (plus x -1)
5831 can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is
5832 the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of
5833 "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */
5834 if (XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx
5835 && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5836 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5837 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))))
5838 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) == 1)
5839 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5840 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5841 gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx),
5842 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
5843 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1);
5845 /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert
5846 the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified,
5847 for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can
5848 become a & 3. */
5850 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5851 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
5852 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)) == 0)
5854 /* Try to simplify the expression further. */
5855 rtx tor = simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5856 temp = combine_simplify_rtx (tor, VOIDmode, in_dest, 0);
5858 /* If we could, great. If not, do not go ahead with the IOR
5859 replacement, since PLUS appears in many special purpose
5860 address arithmetic instructions. */
5861 if (GET_CODE (temp) != CLOBBER
5862 && (GET_CODE (temp) != IOR
5863 || ((XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 0)
5864 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 1))
5865 && (XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 1)
5866 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 0)))))
5867 return temp;
5869 break;
5871 case MINUS:
5872 /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes
5873 (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */
5874 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == AND
5875 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))
5876 && exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))) >= 0
5877 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0)))
5878 return simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5879 -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) - 1);
5880 break;
5882 case MULT:
5883 /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
5884 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This
5885 occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */
5887 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS)
5889 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
5890 if (result)
5891 return result;
5894 /* Try simplify a*(b/c) as (a*b)/c. */
5895 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && flag_associative_math
5896 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == DIV)
5898 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MULT, mode,
5899 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5900 XEXP (x, 1));
5901 if (tem)
5902 return simplify_gen_binary (DIV, mode, tem, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
5904 break;
5906 case UDIV:
5907 /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if
5908 its first operand is a shift. */
5909 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5910 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0
5911 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
5912 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
5913 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
5914 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
5915 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATERT))
5916 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), i);
5917 break;
5919 case EQ: case NE:
5920 case GT: case GTU: case GE: case GEU:
5921 case LT: case LTU: case LE: case LEU:
5922 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
5923 case UNGT: case UNGE:
5924 case UNLT: case UNLE:
5925 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
5926 /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything
5927 with it. */
5928 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == COMPARE
5929 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) != MODE_CC
5930 && ! CC0_P (XEXP (x, 0))))
5932 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5933 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5934 enum rtx_code new_code;
5936 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE)
5937 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
5939 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
5940 new_code = simplify_comparison (code, &op0, &op1);
5942 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X
5943 if only the low-order bit is possibly nonzero in X (such as when
5944 X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit). Similarly, we can convert EQ to
5945 (xor X 1) or (minus 1 X); we use the former. Finally, if X is
5946 known to be either 0 or -1, NE becomes a NEG and EQ becomes
5947 (plus X 1).
5949 Remove any ZERO_EXTRACT we made when thinking this was a
5950 comparison. It may now be simpler to use, e.g., an AND. If a
5951 ZERO_EXTRACT is indeed appropriate, it will be placed back by
5952 the call to make_compound_operation in the SET case.
5954 Don't apply these optimizations if the caller would
5955 prefer a comparison rather than a value.
5956 E.g., for the condition in an IF_THEN_ELSE most targets need
5957 an explicit comparison. */
5959 if (in_cond)
5962 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
5963 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5964 && op1 == const0_rtx
5965 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
5966 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
5967 return gen_lowpart (mode,
5968 expand_compound_operation (op0));
5970 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
5971 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5972 && op1 == const0_rtx
5973 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
5974 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
5975 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
5977 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
5978 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5979 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
5980 mode);
5983 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
5984 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5985 && op1 == const0_rtx
5986 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
5987 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
5989 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
5990 return simplify_gen_binary (XOR, mode,
5991 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
5992 const1_rtx);
5995 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
5996 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5997 && op1 == const0_rtx
5998 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
5999 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6000 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6002 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6003 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), 1);
6006 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we have cases similar to
6007 those above. */
6008 if (in_cond)
6011 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6012 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6013 && op1 == const0_rtx
6014 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6015 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6016 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6017 return gen_lowpart (mode,
6018 expand_compound_operation (op0));
6020 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6021 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6022 && op1 == const0_rtx
6023 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6024 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6026 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6027 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6028 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6029 mode);
6032 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6033 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6034 && op1 == const0_rtx
6035 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6036 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6037 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6039 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6040 return simplify_gen_unary (NOT, mode,
6041 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6042 mode);
6045 /* If X is 0/1, (eq X 0) is X-1. */
6046 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6047 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6048 && op1 == const0_rtx
6049 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6050 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6052 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6053 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), -1);
6056 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just
6057 one bit that might be nonzero, we can convert (ne x 0) to
6058 (ashift x c) where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any
6059 AND with STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only
6060 going to test the sign bit. */
6061 if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6062 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6063 && val_signbit_p (mode, STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
6064 && op1 == const0_rtx
6065 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6066 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (op0, mode))) >= 0)
6068 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6069 expand_compound_operation (op0),
6070 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
6071 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && XEXP (x, 1) == const_true_rtx)
6072 return XEXP (x, 0);
6073 else
6074 return x;
6077 /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison.
6078 We also need to avoid using SUBST in cases where
6079 simplify_comparison has widened a comparison with a CONST_INT,
6080 since in that case the wider CONST_INT may fail the sanity
6081 checks in do_SUBST. */
6082 if (new_code != code
6083 || (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6084 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))
6085 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1))))
6086 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, mode, op0, op1);
6088 /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands.
6089 This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */
6090 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), op0);
6091 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), op1);
6093 break;
6095 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
6096 return simplify_if_then_else (x);
6098 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
6099 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
6100 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6101 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6102 /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */
6103 if (in_dest)
6104 return x;
6106 return expand_compound_operation (x);
6108 case SET:
6109 return simplify_set (x);
6111 case AND:
6112 case IOR:
6113 return simplify_logical (x);
6115 case ASHIFT:
6116 case LSHIFTRT:
6117 case ASHIFTRT:
6118 case ROTATE:
6119 case ROTATERT:
6120 /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */
6121 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6122 return simplify_shift_const (x, code, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
6123 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
6125 else if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6126 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1),
6127 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)),
6128 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
6129 << exact_log2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
6130 - 1,
6131 0));
6132 break;
6134 default:
6135 break;
6138 return x;
6141 /* Simplify X, an IF_THEN_ELSE expression. Return the new expression. */
6143 static rtx
6144 simplify_if_then_else (rtx x)
6146 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6147 rtx cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6148 rtx true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6149 rtx false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6150 enum rtx_code true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6151 int comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6152 rtx temp;
6153 int i;
6154 enum rtx_code false_code;
6155 rtx reversed;
6157 /* Simplify storing of the truth value. */
6158 if (comparison_p && true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
6159 return simplify_gen_relational (true_code, mode, VOIDmode,
6160 XEXP (cond, 0), XEXP (cond, 1));
6162 /* Also when the truth value has to be reversed. */
6163 if (comparison_p
6164 && true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
6165 && (reversed = reversed_comparison (cond, mode)))
6166 return reversed;
6168 /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register used
6169 in it is being compared against certain values. Get the true and false
6170 comparisons and see if that says anything about the value of each arm. */
6172 if (comparison_p
6173 && ((false_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL))
6174 != UNKNOWN)
6175 && REG_P (XEXP (cond, 0)))
6177 HOST_WIDE_INT nzb;
6178 rtx from = XEXP (cond, 0);
6179 rtx true_val = XEXP (cond, 1);
6180 rtx false_val = true_val;
6181 int swapped = 0;
6183 /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */
6185 if (false_code == EQ)
6187 swapped = 1, true_code = EQ, false_code = NE;
6188 temp = true_rtx, true_rtx = false_rtx, false_rtx = temp;
6191 /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being tested has
6192 only a single bit that might be nonzero, that is its value when it is
6193 not equal to zero. Similarly if it is known to be -1 or 0. */
6195 if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6196 && exact_log2 (nzb = nonzero_bits (from, GET_MODE (from))) >= 0)
6198 false_code = EQ;
6199 false_val = gen_int_mode (nzb, GET_MODE (from));
6201 else if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6202 && (num_sign_bit_copies (from, GET_MODE (from))
6203 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (from))))
6205 false_code = EQ;
6206 false_val = constm1_rtx;
6209 /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register in the
6210 branch and it is used in the arm. Be careful due to the potential
6211 of locally-shared RTL. */
6213 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, true_rtx))
6214 true_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_rtx), true_code,
6215 from, true_val),
6216 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6217 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, false_rtx))
6218 false_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_rtx), false_code,
6219 from, false_val),
6220 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6222 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), swapped ? false_rtx : true_rtx);
6223 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), swapped ? true_rtx : false_rtx);
6225 true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6226 false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6227 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6230 /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be
6231 reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for
6232 subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in the true
6233 arm, the false arm is the same as the first operand of the comparison, or
6234 the false arm is more complicated than the true arm. */
6236 if (comparison_p
6237 && reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL) != UNKNOWN
6238 && (true_rtx == pc_rtx
6239 || (CONSTANT_P (true_rtx)
6240 && !CONST_INT_P (false_rtx) && false_rtx != pc_rtx)
6241 || true_rtx == const0_rtx
6242 || (OBJECT_P (true_rtx) && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6243 || (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == SUBREG && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (true_rtx))
6244 && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6245 || reg_mentioned_p (true_rtx, false_rtx)
6246 || rtx_equal_p (false_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))))
6248 true_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL);
6249 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), reversed_comparison (cond, GET_MODE (cond)));
6250 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), false_rtx);
6251 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), true_rtx);
6253 temp = true_rtx, true_rtx = false_rtx, false_rtx = temp;
6254 cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6256 /* It is possible that the conditional has been simplified out. */
6257 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6258 comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6261 /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */
6263 if (rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, false_rtx) && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6264 return true_rtx;
6266 /* Convert a == b ? b : a to "a". */
6267 if (true_code == EQ && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6268 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6269 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), false_rtx)
6270 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), true_rtx))
6271 return false_rtx;
6272 else if (true_code == NE && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6273 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6274 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6275 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx))
6276 return true_rtx;
6278 /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */
6280 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6281 && comparison_p
6282 && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6283 && GET_CODE (false_rtx) == NEG
6284 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (false_rtx, 0))
6285 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))
6286 && ! side_effects_p (true_rtx))
6287 switch (true_code)
6289 case GT:
6290 case GE:
6291 return simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode);
6292 case LT:
6293 case LE:
6294 return
6295 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6296 simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode),
6297 mode);
6298 default:
6299 break;
6302 /* Look for MIN or MAX. */
6304 if ((! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
6305 && comparison_p
6306 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6307 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx)
6308 && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6309 switch (true_code)
6311 case GE:
6312 case GT:
6313 return simplify_gen_binary (SMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6314 case LE:
6315 case LT:
6316 return simplify_gen_binary (SMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6317 case GEU:
6318 case GTU:
6319 return simplify_gen_binary (UMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6320 case LEU:
6321 case LTU:
6322 return simplify_gen_binary (UMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6323 default:
6324 break;
6327 /* If we have (if_then_else COND (OP Z C1) Z) and OP is an identity when its
6328 second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP Z (mult COND C2)) where
6329 C2 = C1 * STORE_FLAG_VALUE. Similarly if OP has an outer ZERO_EXTEND or
6330 SIGN_EXTEND as long as Z is already extended (so we don't destroy it).
6331 We can do this kind of thing in some cases when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is
6332 neither 1 or -1, but it isn't worth checking for. */
6334 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
6335 && comparison_p
6336 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6337 && ! side_effects_p (x))
6339 rtx t = make_compound_operation (true_rtx, SET);
6340 rtx f = make_compound_operation (false_rtx, SET);
6341 rtx cond_op0 = XEXP (cond, 0);
6342 rtx cond_op1 = XEXP (cond, 1);
6343 enum rtx_code op = UNKNOWN, extend_op = UNKNOWN;
6344 machine_mode m = mode;
6345 rtx z = 0, c1 = NULL_RTX;
6347 if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == MINUS
6348 || GET_CODE (t) == IOR || GET_CODE (t) == XOR
6349 || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFT
6350 || GET_CODE (t) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFTRT)
6351 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 0), f))
6352 c1 = XEXP (t, 1), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6354 /* If an identity-zero op is commutative, check whether there
6355 would be a match if we swapped the operands. */
6356 else if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == IOR
6357 || GET_CODE (t) == XOR)
6358 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 1), f))
6359 c1 = XEXP (t, 0), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6360 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6361 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6362 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6363 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6364 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6365 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6366 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6367 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6368 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6369 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6370 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6371 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6372 > (unsigned int)
6373 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6374 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))))
6376 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6377 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6378 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6380 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6381 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6382 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6383 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6384 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6385 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6386 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6387 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6388 > (unsigned int)
6389 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6390 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))))
6392 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6393 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6394 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6396 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6397 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6398 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6399 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6400 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6401 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6402 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6403 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6404 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6405 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6406 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6407 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6408 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6409 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))
6410 == 0))
6412 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6413 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6414 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6416 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6417 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6418 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6419 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6420 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6421 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6422 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6423 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6424 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6425 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))
6426 == 0))
6428 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6429 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6430 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6433 if (z)
6435 temp = subst (simplify_gen_relational (true_code, m, VOIDmode,
6436 cond_op0, cond_op1),
6437 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6438 temp = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, temp,
6439 simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, c1,
6440 const_true_rtx));
6441 temp = subst (temp, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6442 temp = simplify_gen_binary (op, m, gen_lowpart (m, z), temp);
6444 if (extend_op != UNKNOWN)
6445 temp = simplify_gen_unary (extend_op, mode, temp, m);
6447 return temp;
6451 /* If we have (if_then_else (ne A 0) C1 0) and either A is known to be 0 or
6452 1 and C1 is a single bit or A is known to be 0 or -1 and C1 is the
6453 negation of a single bit, we can convert this operation to a shift. We
6454 can actually do this more generally, but it doesn't seem worth it. */
6456 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6457 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6458 && ((1 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6459 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)
6460 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6461 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
6462 && (i = exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)))
6463 return
6464 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6465 gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (cond, 0)), i);
6467 /* (IF_THEN_ELSE (NE REG 0) (0) (8)) is REG for nonzero_bits (REG) == 8. */
6468 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6469 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6470 && GET_MODE (XEXP (cond, 0)) == mode
6471 && (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
6472 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6473 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))) >= 0)
6474 return XEXP (cond, 0);
6476 return x;
6479 /* Simplify X, a SET expression. Return the new expression. */
6481 static rtx
6482 simplify_set (rtx x)
6484 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
6485 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
6486 machine_mode mode
6487 = GET_MODE (src) != VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (src) : GET_MODE (dest);
6488 rtx_insn *other_insn;
6489 rtx *cc_use;
6491 /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */
6492 if (GET_CODE (dest) == PC && ANY_RETURN_P (src))
6493 return src;
6495 /* Now that we know for sure which bits of SRC we are using, see if we can
6496 simplify the expression for the object knowing that we only need the
6497 low-order bits. */
6499 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
6501 src = force_to_mode (src, mode, ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, 0);
6502 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6505 /* If we are setting CC0 or if the source is a COMPARE, look for the use of
6506 the comparison result and try to simplify it unless we already have used
6507 undobuf.other_insn. */
6508 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC
6509 || GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE
6510 || CC0_P (dest))
6511 && (cc_use = find_single_use (dest, subst_insn, &other_insn)) != 0
6512 && (undobuf.other_insn == 0 || other_insn == undobuf.other_insn)
6513 && COMPARISON_P (*cc_use)
6514 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), dest))
6516 enum rtx_code old_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use);
6517 enum rtx_code new_code;
6518 rtx op0, op1, tmp;
6519 int other_changed = 0;
6520 rtx inner_compare = NULL_RTX;
6521 machine_mode compare_mode = GET_MODE (dest);
6523 if (GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE)
6525 op0 = XEXP (src, 0), op1 = XEXP (src, 1);
6526 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
6528 inner_compare = op0;
6529 op0 = XEXP (inner_compare, 0), op1 = XEXP (inner_compare, 1);
6532 else
6533 op0 = src, op1 = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (src));
6535 tmp = simplify_relational_operation (old_code, compare_mode, VOIDmode,
6536 op0, op1);
6537 if (!tmp)
6538 new_code = old_code;
6539 else if (!CONSTANT_P (tmp))
6541 new_code = GET_CODE (tmp);
6542 op0 = XEXP (tmp, 0);
6543 op1 = XEXP (tmp, 1);
6545 else
6547 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn);
6548 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6549 SUBST (*cc_use, tmp);
6551 /* Attempt to simplify CC user. */
6552 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
6554 rtx new_rtx = simplify_rtx (SET_SRC (pat));
6555 if (new_rtx != NULL_RTX)
6556 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat), new_rtx);
6559 /* Convert X into a no-op move. */
6560 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), pc_rtx);
6561 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), pc_rtx);
6562 return x;
6565 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6566 new_code = simplify_comparison (new_code, &op0, &op1);
6568 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
6569 /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see if we
6570 need to use a different CC mode here. */
6571 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC)
6572 compare_mode = GET_MODE (op0);
6573 else if (inner_compare
6574 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner_compare)) == MODE_CC
6575 && new_code == old_code
6576 && op0 == XEXP (inner_compare, 0)
6577 && op1 == XEXP (inner_compare, 1))
6578 compare_mode = GET_MODE (inner_compare);
6579 else
6580 compare_mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code, op0, op1);
6582 /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode in the
6583 compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. If SET_DEST is
6584 a hard register, just build new versions with the proper mode. If it
6585 is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only time we set the pseudo, in
6586 which case we can safely change its mode. */
6587 if (!HAVE_cc0 && compare_mode != GET_MODE (dest))
6589 if (can_change_dest_mode (dest, 0, compare_mode))
6591 unsigned int regno = REGNO (dest);
6592 rtx new_dest;
6594 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6595 new_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
6596 else
6598 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
6599 new_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
6602 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), new_dest);
6603 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), new_dest);
6604 other_changed = 1;
6606 dest = new_dest;
6609 #endif /* SELECT_CC_MODE */
6611 /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison in
6612 undobuf.other_insn. */
6613 if (new_code != old_code)
6615 int other_changed_previously = other_changed;
6616 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
6617 rtx old_cc_use = *cc_use;
6619 SUBST (*cc_use, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, GET_MODE (*cc_use),
6620 dest, const0_rtx));
6621 other_changed = 1;
6623 /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an NE or
6624 vice versa, OP0 has only one bit that might be nonzero, and OP1
6625 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition code will
6626 produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep the original code
6627 in that insn by surrounding our operation with an XOR. */
6629 if (((old_code == NE && new_code == EQ)
6630 || (old_code == EQ && new_code == NE))
6631 && ! other_changed_previously && op1 == const0_rtx
6632 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
6633 && exact_log2 (mask = nonzero_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0))) >= 0)
6635 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn), note = 0;
6637 if ((recog_for_combine (&pat, other_insn, &note) < 0
6638 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)))
6640 *cc_use = old_cc_use;
6641 other_changed = 0;
6643 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
6644 gen_int_mode (mask,
6645 GET_MODE (op0)));
6650 if (other_changed)
6651 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6653 /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have a COMPARE in the
6654 correct mode, we need one. */
6655 if (GET_CODE (src) != COMPARE || GET_MODE (src) != compare_mode)
6657 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
6658 src = SET_SRC (x);
6660 else if (GET_MODE (op0) == compare_mode && op1 == const0_rtx)
6662 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), op0);
6663 src = SET_SRC (x);
6665 /* Otherwise, update the COMPARE if needed. */
6666 else if (XEXP (src, 0) != op0 || XEXP (src, 1) != op1)
6668 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
6669 src = SET_SRC (x);
6672 else
6674 /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any
6675 compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */
6676 src = make_compound_operation (src, SET);
6677 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6680 /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some operation,
6681 and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to convert this to
6682 (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)).
6684 We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that means that
6685 we only care about the low bits of the result.
6687 However, on machines without WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS defined, we cannot
6688 perform a narrower operation than requested since the high-order bits will
6689 be undefined. On machine where it is defined, this transformation is safe
6690 as long as M1 and M2 have the same number of words. */
6692 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6693 && !OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (src))
6694 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1))
6695 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
6696 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6697 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))
6698 #ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
6699 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6700 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))))
6701 #endif
6702 #ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
6703 && ! (REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6704 && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (dest),
6705 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6706 GET_MODE (src)))
6707 #endif
6708 && (REG_P (dest)
6709 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6710 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest)))))
6712 SUBST (SET_DEST (x),
6713 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6714 dest));
6715 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), SUBREG_REG (src));
6717 src = SET_SRC (x), dest = SET_DEST (x);
6720 /* If we have (set (cc0) (subreg ...)), we try to remove the subreg
6721 in SRC. */
6722 if (dest == cc0_rtx
6723 && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6724 && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6725 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (src))
6726 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6728 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (src);
6729 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
6731 /* Here we make sure that we don't have a sign bit on. */
6732 if (val_signbit_known_clear_p (GET_MODE (src),
6733 nonzero_bits (inner, inner_mode)))
6735 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), inner);
6736 src = SET_SRC (x);
6740 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
6741 /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with M wider than N, this
6742 would require a paradoxical subreg. Replace the subreg with a
6743 zero_extend to avoid the reload that would otherwise be required. */
6745 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6746 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6747 && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))) != UNKNOWN
6748 && SUBREG_BYTE (src) == 0
6749 && paradoxical_subreg_p (src)
6750 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6752 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6753 gen_rtx_fmt_e (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))),
6754 GET_MODE (src), SUBREG_REG (src)));
6756 src = SET_SRC (x);
6758 #endif
6760 /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, and we
6761 are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a logical
6762 operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR of the other
6763 arm with some value. We compute three terms to be IOR'ed together. In
6764 practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then we do the IOR's. */
6766 if (GET_CODE (dest) != PC
6767 && GET_CODE (src) == IF_THEN_ELSE
6768 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) == MODE_INT
6769 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == EQ || GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE)
6770 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1) == const0_rtx
6771 && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
6772 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
6773 && ! can_conditionally_move_p (GET_MODE (src))
6774 #endif
6775 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6776 GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)))
6777 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))))
6778 && ! side_effects_p (src))
6780 rtx true_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6781 ? XEXP (src, 1) : XEXP (src, 2));
6782 rtx false_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6783 ? XEXP (src, 2) : XEXP (src, 1));
6784 rtx term1 = const0_rtx, term2, term3;
6786 if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6787 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx))
6788 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6789 else if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6790 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx))
6791 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6792 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6793 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx))
6794 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6795 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6796 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx))
6797 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6799 term2 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6800 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0), true_rtx);
6801 term3 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6802 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (src),
6803 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6804 GET_MODE (src)),
6805 false_rtx);
6807 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6808 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6809 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6810 term1, term2),
6811 term3));
6813 src = SET_SRC (x);
6816 /* If either SRC or DEST is a CLOBBER of (const_int 0), make this
6817 whole thing fail. */
6818 if (GET_CODE (src) == CLOBBER && XEXP (src, 0) == const0_rtx)
6819 return src;
6820 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == CLOBBER && XEXP (dest, 0) == const0_rtx)
6821 return dest;
6822 else
6823 /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */
6824 return make_field_assignment (x);
6827 /* Simplify, X, and AND, IOR, or XOR operation, and return the simplified
6828 result. */
6830 static rtx
6831 simplify_logical (rtx x)
6833 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6834 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6835 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6837 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6839 case AND:
6840 /* We can call simplify_and_const_int only if we don't lose
6841 any (sign) bits when converting INTVAL (op1) to
6842 "unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT". */
6843 if (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6844 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6845 || INTVAL (op1) > 0))
6847 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, mode, op0, INTVAL (op1));
6848 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND)
6849 return x;
6851 op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6852 op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6855 /* If we have any of (and (ior A B) C) or (and (xor A B) C),
6856 apply the distributive law and then the inverse distributive
6857 law to see if things simplify. */
6858 if (GET_CODE (op0) == IOR || GET_CODE (op0) == XOR)
6860 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6861 if (result)
6862 return result;
6864 if (GET_CODE (op1) == IOR || GET_CODE (op1) == XOR)
6866 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6867 if (result)
6868 return result;
6870 break;
6872 case IOR:
6873 /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
6874 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */
6876 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND)
6878 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6879 if (result)
6880 return result;
6883 if (GET_CODE (op1) == AND)
6885 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6886 if (result)
6887 return result;
6889 break;
6891 default:
6892 gcc_unreachable ();
6895 return x;
6898 /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound
6899 operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations.
6900 ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with
6901 an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation.
6903 The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression
6904 and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations,
6905 simplifying at each stage.
6907 The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression
6908 consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression.
6909 It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */
6911 static rtx
6912 expand_compound_operation (rtx x)
6914 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0, len;
6915 int unsignedp = 0;
6916 unsigned int modewidth;
6917 rtx tem;
6919 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6921 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6922 unsignedp = 1;
6923 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6924 /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode;
6925 it depends on implicitly extending the value.
6926 Since we don't know the right way to extend it,
6927 we can't tell whether the implicit way is right.
6929 Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int,
6930 we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through
6931 the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */
6932 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6933 return x;
6935 /* Return if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is not a safe replacement for
6936 (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). It is for any MEM
6937 because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be
6938 reloaded. If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe.
6940 Reject MODEs bigger than a word, because we might not be able
6941 to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register
6942 (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */
6944 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
6945 return x;
6947 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
6948 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
6950 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
6951 return x;
6953 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
6954 /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen
6955 is if it is an ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't
6956 know how much masking to do. */
6957 if (len == 0)
6958 return x;
6960 break;
6962 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
6963 unsignedp = 1;
6965 /* ... fall through ... */
6967 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
6968 /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */
6969 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
6970 return XEXP (x, 0);
6972 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
6973 || !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 2))
6974 || GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == VOIDmode)
6975 return x;
6977 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
6978 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
6980 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
6981 return x;
6983 len = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
6984 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2));
6986 /* This should stay within the object being extracted, fail otherwise. */
6987 if (len + pos > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
6988 return x;
6990 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6991 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - len - pos;
6993 break;
6995 default:
6996 return x;
6998 /* Convert sign extension to zero extension, if we know that the high
6999 bit is not set, as this is easier to optimize. It will be converted
7000 back to cheaper alternative in make_extraction. */
7001 if (GET_CODE (x) == SIGN_EXTEND
7002 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7003 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7004 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7005 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7006 >> 1))
7007 == 0)))
7009 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0));
7010 rtx temp2 = expand_compound_operation (temp);
7012 /* Make sure this is a profitable operation. */
7013 if (set_src_cost (x, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7014 > set_src_cost (temp2, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7015 return temp2;
7016 else if (set_src_cost (x, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7017 > set_src_cost (temp, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7018 return temp;
7019 else
7020 return x;
7023 /* We can optimize some special cases of ZERO_EXTEND. */
7024 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
7026 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI if we
7027 know that the last value didn't have any inappropriate bits
7028 set. */
7029 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7030 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7031 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7032 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), GET_MODE (x))
7033 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7034 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7036 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7037 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7038 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7039 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7040 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7041 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), GET_MODE (x))
7042 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7043 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7045 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI when foo
7046 is a comparison and STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. This is like
7047 the first case, but it works even when GET_MODE (x) is larger
7048 than HOST_WIDE_INT. */
7049 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7050 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7051 && COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
7052 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7053 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7054 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7055 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7057 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7058 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7059 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7060 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7061 && COMPARISON_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))
7062 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7063 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7064 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7065 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7069 /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner
7070 shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer
7071 shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or
7072 logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP.
7074 If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be
7075 converted into an AND of a shift.
7077 We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative
7078 count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines
7079 that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first
7080 combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position
7081 extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in
7082 to produce such a position. */
7084 modewidth = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x));
7085 if (modewidth >= pos + len)
7087 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7088 tem = gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
7089 if (!tem || GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7090 return x;
7091 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
7092 tem, modewidth - pos - len);
7093 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT,
7094 mode, tem, modewidth - len);
7096 else if (unsignedp && len < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7097 tem = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (x),
7098 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
7099 GET_MODE (x),
7100 XEXP (x, 0), pos),
7101 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1);
7102 else
7103 /* Any other cases we can't handle. */
7104 return x;
7106 /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original
7107 expression. */
7108 if (GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7109 return x;
7111 return tem;
7114 /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into
7115 a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART,
7116 or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of
7117 logical operations.
7119 We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all
7120 support variable lengths. */
7122 static const_rtx
7123 expand_field_assignment (const_rtx x)
7125 rtx inner;
7126 rtx pos; /* Always counts from low bit. */
7127 int len;
7128 rtx mask, cleared, masked;
7129 machine_mode compute_mode;
7131 /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */
7132 while (1)
7134 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7135 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)) == SUBREG)
7137 inner = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0));
7138 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7139 pos = GEN_INT (subreg_lsb (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7141 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
7142 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)))
7144 inner = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
7145 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
7146 pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2);
7148 /* A constant position should stay within the width of INNER. */
7149 if (CONST_INT_P (pos)
7150 && INTVAL (pos) + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
7151 break;
7153 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7155 if (CONST_INT_P (pos))
7156 pos = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len
7157 - INTVAL (pos));
7158 else if (GET_CODE (pos) == MINUS
7159 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (pos, 1))
7160 && (INTVAL (XEXP (pos, 1))
7161 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len))
7162 /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */
7163 pos = XEXP (pos, 0);
7164 else
7166 HOST_WIDE_INT prec = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
7167 pos = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, GET_MODE (pos),
7168 gen_int_mode (prec - len,
7169 GET_MODE (pos)),
7170 pos);
7175 /* A SUBREG between two modes that occupy the same numbers of words
7176 can be done by moving the SUBREG to the source. */
7177 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7178 /* We need SUBREGs to compute nonzero_bits properly. */
7179 && nonzero_sign_valid
7180 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
7181 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7182 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
7183 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
7185 x = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)),
7186 gen_lowpart
7187 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))),
7188 SET_SRC (x)));
7189 continue;
7191 else
7192 break;
7194 while (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7195 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7197 compute_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7199 /* Don't attempt bitwise arithmetic on non scalar integer modes. */
7200 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7202 machine_mode imode;
7204 /* Don't do anything for vector or complex integral types. */
7205 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7206 break;
7208 /* Try to find an integral mode to pun with. */
7209 imode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (compute_mode), MODE_INT, 0);
7210 if (imode == BLKmode)
7211 break;
7213 compute_mode = imode;
7214 inner = gen_lowpart (imode, inner);
7217 /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */
7218 if (len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7219 break;
7221 /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER
7222 for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute;
7223 we don't want shared RTL in that case. */
7224 mask = gen_int_mode (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
7225 compute_mode);
7226 cleared = simplify_gen_binary (AND, compute_mode,
7227 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, compute_mode,
7228 simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT,
7229 compute_mode,
7230 mask, pos),
7231 compute_mode),
7232 inner);
7233 masked = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, compute_mode,
7234 simplify_gen_binary (
7235 AND, compute_mode,
7236 gen_lowpart (compute_mode, SET_SRC (x)),
7237 mask),
7238 pos);
7240 x = gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, copy_rtx (inner),
7241 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, compute_mode,
7242 cleared, masked));
7245 return x;
7248 /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. If POS_RTX is nonzero,
7249 it is an RTX that represents the (variable) starting position; otherwise,
7250 POS is the (constant) starting bit position. Both are counted from the LSB.
7252 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero for an unsigned reference and zero for a signed one.
7254 IN_DEST is nonzero if this is a reference in the destination of a SET.
7255 This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If nonzero,
7256 a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will
7257 be used.
7259 IN_COMPARE is nonzero if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a
7260 ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0.
7262 MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0).
7264 The result is an RTX for the extraction or NULL_RTX if the target
7265 can't handle it. */
7267 static rtx
7268 make_extraction (machine_mode mode, rtx inner, HOST_WIDE_INT pos,
7269 rtx pos_rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, int unsignedp,
7270 int in_dest, int in_compare)
7272 /* This mode describes the size of the storage area
7273 to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we
7274 ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */
7275 machine_mode is_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7276 machine_mode inner_mode;
7277 machine_mode wanted_inner_mode;
7278 machine_mode wanted_inner_reg_mode = word_mode;
7279 machine_mode pos_mode = word_mode;
7280 machine_mode extraction_mode = word_mode;
7281 machine_mode tmode = mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT, 1);
7282 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7283 rtx orig_pos_rtx = pos_rtx;
7284 HOST_WIDE_INT orig_pos;
7286 if (pos_rtx && CONST_INT_P (pos_rtx))
7287 pos = INTVAL (pos_rtx), pos_rtx = 0;
7289 if (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7291 /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...),
7292 consider just the QI as the memory to extract from.
7293 The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is
7294 irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction,
7295 since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */
7296 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (inner)))
7297 is_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner));
7298 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7300 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == ASHIFT
7301 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
7302 && pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0
7303 && len > UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
7305 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7306 (ashift X (const_int C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7307 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7308 whose mode is MODE, then shift it left C times. */
7309 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (inner, 0),
7310 0, 0, len - INTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)),
7311 unsignedp, in_dest, in_compare);
7312 if (new_rtx != 0)
7313 return gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode, new_rtx, XEXP (inner, 1));
7315 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == TRUNCATE)
7316 inner = XEXP (inner, 0);
7318 inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7320 /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the
7321 width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For
7322 registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the
7323 low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the
7324 appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available.
7326 For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate
7327 boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. */
7329 if (tmode != BLKmode
7330 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && (pos % BITS_PER_WORD) == 0
7331 && !MEM_P (inner)
7332 && (inner_mode == tmode
7333 || !REG_P (inner)
7334 || TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode, inner_mode)
7335 || reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode, inner))
7336 && (! in_dest
7337 || (REG_P (inner)
7338 && have_insn_for (STRICT_LOW_PART, tmode))))
7339 || (MEM_P (inner) && pos_rtx == 0
7340 && (pos
7341 % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT ? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)
7342 : BITS_PER_UNIT)) == 0
7343 /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it
7344 may not be aligned, for one thing). */
7345 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
7346 && (inner_mode == tmode
7347 || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0),
7348 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7349 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))))))
7351 /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired
7352 field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not
7353 adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian.
7355 If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of just the field
7356 of interest (in this case POS % BITS_PER_WORD must be 0). */
7358 if (MEM_P (inner))
7360 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
7362 /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */
7363 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
7364 offset = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode) - len - pos) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7365 else
7366 offset = pos / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7368 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (inner, tmode, offset);
7370 else if (REG_P (inner))
7372 if (tmode != inner_mode)
7374 /* We can't call gen_lowpart in a DEST since we
7375 always want a SUBREG (see below) and it would sometimes
7376 return a new hard register. */
7377 if (pos || in_dest)
7379 HOST_WIDE_INT final_word = pos / BITS_PER_WORD;
7381 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
7382 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
7383 final_word = ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7384 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7385 / UNITS_PER_WORD) - final_word;
7387 final_word *= UNITS_PER_WORD;
7388 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN &&
7389 GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7390 final_word += (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7391 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode)) % UNITS_PER_WORD;
7393 /* Avoid creating invalid subregs, for example when
7394 simplifying (x>>32)&255. */
7395 if (!validate_subreg (tmode, inner_mode, inner, final_word))
7396 return NULL_RTX;
7398 new_rtx = gen_rtx_SUBREG (tmode, inner, final_word);
7400 else
7401 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (tmode, inner);
7403 else
7404 new_rtx = inner;
7406 else
7407 new_rtx = force_to_mode (inner, tmode,
7408 len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7409 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
7410 : ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
7413 /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET,
7414 make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */
7416 if (in_dest)
7417 return (MEM_P (new_rtx) ? new_rtx
7418 : (GET_CODE (new_rtx) != SUBREG
7419 ? gen_rtx_CLOBBER (tmode, const0_rtx)
7420 : gen_rtx_STRICT_LOW_PART (VOIDmode, new_rtx)));
7422 if (mode == tmode)
7423 return new_rtx;
7425 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
7426 return simplify_unary_operation (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7427 mode, new_rtx, tmode);
7429 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7430 bit is not set, convert the extraction to the cheaper of
7431 sign and zero extension, that are equivalent in these cases. */
7432 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7433 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
7434 && ((nonzero_bits (new_rtx, tmode)
7435 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) >> 1))
7436 == 0)))
7438 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7439 rtx temp1 = gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7441 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7442 backends. */
7443 if (set_src_cost (temp, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7444 <= set_src_cost (temp1, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7445 return temp;
7446 return temp1;
7449 /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the
7450 proper mode. */
7452 return (gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7453 mode, new_rtx));
7456 /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference,
7457 don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at
7458 the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */
7459 if (pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0 && ! in_dest
7460 && ! in_compare && unsignedp)
7461 return 0;
7463 /* Unless INNER is not MEM, reject this if we would be spanning bytes or
7464 if the position is not a constant and the length is not 1. In all
7465 other cases, we would only be going outside our object in cases when
7466 an original shift would have been undefined. */
7467 if (MEM_P (inner)
7468 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode))
7469 || (pos_rtx != 0 && len != 1)))
7470 return 0;
7472 enum extraction_pattern pattern = (in_dest ? EP_insv
7473 : unsignedp ? EP_extzv : EP_extv);
7475 /* If INNER is not from memory, we want it to have the mode of a register
7476 extraction pattern's structure operand, or word_mode if there is no
7477 such pattern. The same applies to extraction_mode and pos_mode
7478 and their respective operands.
7480 For memory, assume that the desired extraction_mode and pos_mode
7481 are the same as for a register operation, since at present we don't
7482 have named patterns for aligned memory structures. */
7483 struct extraction_insn insn;
7484 if (get_best_reg_extraction_insn (&insn, pattern,
7485 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode), mode))
7487 wanted_inner_reg_mode = insn.struct_mode;
7488 pos_mode = insn.pos_mode;
7489 extraction_mode = insn.field_mode;
7492 /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */
7494 if (mode != VOIDmode
7495 && GET_MODE_SIZE (extraction_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
7496 extraction_mode = mode;
7498 if (!MEM_P (inner))
7499 wanted_inner_mode = wanted_inner_reg_mode;
7500 else
7502 /* Be careful not to go beyond the extracted object and maintain the
7503 natural alignment of the memory. */
7504 wanted_inner_mode = smallest_mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT);
7505 while (pos % GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode) + len
7506 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7508 wanted_inner_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wanted_inner_mode);
7509 gcc_assert (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode);
7513 orig_pos = pos;
7515 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7517 /* POS is passed as if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0, so we need to convert it to
7518 BITS_BIG_ENDIAN style. If position is constant, compute new
7519 position. Otherwise, build subtraction.
7520 Note that POS is relative to the mode of the original argument.
7521 If it's a MEM we need to recompute POS relative to that.
7522 However, if we're extracting from (or inserting into) a register,
7523 we want to recompute POS relative to wanted_inner_mode. */
7524 int width = (MEM_P (inner)
7525 ? GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode)
7526 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode));
7528 if (pos_rtx == 0)
7529 pos = width - len - pos;
7530 else
7531 pos_rtx
7532 = gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (pos_rtx),
7533 gen_int_mode (width - len, GET_MODE (pos_rtx)),
7534 pos_rtx);
7535 /* POS may be less than 0 now, but we check for that below.
7536 Note that it can only be less than 0 if !MEM_P (inner). */
7539 /* If INNER has a wider mode, and this is a constant extraction, try to
7540 make it smaller and adjust the byte to point to the byte containing
7541 the value. */
7542 if (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode
7543 && inner_mode != wanted_inner_mode
7544 && ! pos_rtx
7545 && GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7546 && MEM_P (inner)
7547 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7548 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))
7550 int offset = 0;
7552 /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big
7553 endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes.
7554 If it is mixed, we must adjust. */
7556 /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must
7557 adjust OFFSET to compensate. */
7558 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7559 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode))
7560 offset -= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode);
7562 /* We can now move to the desired byte. */
7563 offset += (pos / GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7564 * GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7565 pos %= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7567 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
7568 && is_mode != wanted_inner_mode)
7569 offset = (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7570 - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) - offset);
7572 inner = adjust_address_nv (inner, wanted_inner_mode, offset);
7575 /* If INNER is not memory, get it into the proper mode. If we are changing
7576 its mode, POS must be a constant and smaller than the size of the new
7577 mode. */
7578 else if (!MEM_P (inner))
7580 /* On the LHS, don't create paradoxical subregs implicitely truncating
7581 the register unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION. */
7582 if (in_dest
7583 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (GET_MODE (inner),
7584 wanted_inner_mode))
7585 return NULL_RTX;
7587 if (GET_MODE (inner) != wanted_inner_mode
7588 && (pos_rtx != 0
7589 || orig_pos + len > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode)))
7590 return NULL_RTX;
7592 if (orig_pos < 0)
7593 return NULL_RTX;
7595 inner = force_to_mode (inner, wanted_inner_mode,
7596 pos_rtx
7597 || len + orig_pos >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7598 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
7599 : ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1)
7600 << orig_pos),
7604 /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we
7605 have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG. */
7606 if (pos_rtx != 0
7607 && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7609 rtx temp = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7610 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7612 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7613 bit is not set, convert extraction to cheaper one - either
7614 SIGN_EXTENSION or ZERO_EXTENSION, that are equivalent in these
7615 cases. */
7616 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7617 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7618 && ((nonzero_bits (pos_rtx, GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7619 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7620 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7621 >> 1))
7622 == 0)))
7624 rtx temp1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7625 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7627 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7628 backends. */
7629 if (set_src_cost (temp1, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7630 < set_src_cost (temp, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7631 temp = temp1;
7633 pos_rtx = temp;
7636 /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. If we don't
7637 have a POS_RTX but we do have an ORIG_POS_RTX, the latter must
7638 be a CONST_INT. */
7639 if (pos_rtx == 0 && orig_pos_rtx != 0 && INTVAL (orig_pos_rtx) == pos)
7640 pos_rtx = orig_pos_rtx;
7642 else if (pos_rtx == 0)
7643 pos_rtx = GEN_INT (pos);
7645 /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */
7646 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_eee (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTRACT : SIGN_EXTRACT,
7647 extraction_mode, inner, GEN_INT (len), pos_rtx);
7648 if (! in_dest)
7649 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7651 return new_rtx;
7654 /* See if X contains an ASHIFT of COUNT or more bits that can be commuted
7655 with any other operations in X. Return X without that shift if so. */
7657 static rtx
7658 extract_left_shift (rtx x, int count)
7660 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7661 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7662 rtx tem;
7664 switch (code)
7666 case ASHIFT:
7667 /* This is the shift itself. If it is wide enough, we will return
7668 either the value being shifted if the shift count is equal to
7669 COUNT or a shift for the difference. */
7670 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7671 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= count)
7672 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
7673 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) - count);
7674 break;
7676 case NEG: case NOT:
7677 if ((tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7678 return simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, tem, mode);
7680 break;
7682 case PLUS: case IOR: case XOR: case AND:
7683 /* If we can safely shift this constant and we find the inner shift,
7684 make a new operation. */
7685 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7686 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
7687 & ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count)) - 1)) == 0
7688 && (tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7690 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >> count;
7691 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, tem,
7692 gen_int_mode (val, mode));
7694 break;
7696 default:
7697 break;
7700 return 0;
7703 /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions
7704 equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND.
7705 Form these expressions.
7707 Return the new rtx, usually just X.
7709 Also, for machines like the VAX that don't have logical shift insns,
7710 try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where
7711 they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical
7712 shifts done elsewhere.
7714 We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory.
7716 IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is
7717 SET. In a memory address (inside a MEM, PLUS or minus, the latter two
7718 being kludges), it is MEM. When processing the arguments of a comparison
7719 or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE. */
7722 make_compound_operation (rtx x, enum rtx_code in_code)
7724 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7725 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7726 int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
7727 rtx rhs, lhs;
7728 enum rtx_code next_code;
7729 int i, j;
7730 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7731 rtx tem;
7732 const char *fmt;
7734 /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an
7735 address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE,
7736 but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */
7738 next_code = (code == MEM ? MEM
7739 : ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
7740 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)) ? MEM
7741 : ((code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
7742 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx) ? COMPARE
7743 : in_code == COMPARE ? SET : in_code);
7745 /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set
7746 nonzero, it will be returned. */
7748 switch (code)
7750 case ASHIFT:
7751 /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside
7752 an address. */
7753 if (in_code == MEM && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7754 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7755 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
7756 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7758 HOST_WIDE_INT count = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
7759 HOST_WIDE_INT multval = (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count;
7761 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
7762 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == NEG)
7764 new_rtx = XEXP (new_rtx, 0);
7765 multval = -multval;
7767 multval = trunc_int_for_mode (multval, mode);
7768 new_rtx = gen_rtx_MULT (mode, new_rtx, gen_int_mode (multval, mode));
7770 break;
7772 case PLUS:
7773 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7774 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7775 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7776 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7777 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 0)) == NEG
7778 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7780 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (lhs, 0), 0),
7781 XEXP (lhs, 1));
7782 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7784 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
7785 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < 0))
7787 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (lhs, 0),
7788 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7789 XEXP (lhs, 1),
7790 mode));
7791 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7793 else
7795 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7796 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7797 goto maybe_swap;
7799 x = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7800 goto maybe_swap;
7802 case MINUS:
7803 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7804 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7805 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7806 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7807 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 0)) == NEG
7808 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7810 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (rhs, 0), 0),
7811 XEXP (rhs, 1));
7812 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7814 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
7815 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < 0))
7817 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (rhs, 0),
7818 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7819 XEXP (rhs, 1),
7820 mode));
7821 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7823 else
7825 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7826 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7827 return x;
7829 return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7831 case AND:
7832 /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything
7833 with it. */
7834 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
7835 break;
7837 /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand
7838 is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */
7839 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7840 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7842 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7843 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), i, 1,
7844 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7847 /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */
7848 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7849 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7850 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == LSHIFTRT
7851 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7853 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 0),
7854 next_code);
7855 new_rtx = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))), new_rtx, 0,
7856 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 1), i, 1,
7857 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7859 /* Same as previous, but for (xor/ior (lshiftrt...) (lshiftrt...)). */
7860 else if ((GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
7861 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR)
7862 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7863 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == LSHIFTRT
7864 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7866 /* Apply the distributive law, and then try to make extractions. */
7867 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode,
7868 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
7869 XEXP (x, 1)),
7870 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1),
7871 XEXP (x, 1)));
7872 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (new_rtx, in_code);
7875 /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number
7876 of bits in M, this is an extraction. */
7878 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
7879 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
7880 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0
7881 && i <= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
7883 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7884 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
7885 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
7886 - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))),
7887 NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7890 /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is
7891 a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign
7892 bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */
7893 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7894 && !have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
7895 && have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
7896 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
7897 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
7898 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7899 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7901 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
7903 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
7904 if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~mask) == 0)
7905 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
7906 gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
7907 make_compound_operation
7908 (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code),
7909 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)));
7912 /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be
7913 representable by an extraction even if no shift is present.
7914 If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless
7915 we are in a COMPARE. */
7916 else if ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7917 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
7918 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7919 next_code),
7920 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7922 /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two,
7923 convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */
7924 else if (in_code == COMPARE
7925 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0)
7926 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
7927 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7928 next_code),
7929 i, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 1);
7931 break;
7933 case LSHIFTRT:
7934 /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an
7935 arithmetic shift. */
7936 if (have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
7937 && ! have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
7938 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7939 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & (1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0)
7941 new_rtx = gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
7942 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7943 next_code),
7944 XEXP (x, 1));
7945 break;
7948 /* ... fall through ... */
7950 case ASHIFTRT:
7951 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7952 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7954 /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1,
7955 this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */
7956 if (CONST_INT_P (rhs)
7957 && GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
7958 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
7959 && INTVAL (rhs) >= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1))
7960 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
7961 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width)
7963 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (lhs, 0), next_code);
7964 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
7965 INTVAL (rhs) - INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)),
7966 NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
7967 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7968 break;
7971 /* See if we have operations between an ASHIFTRT and an ASHIFT.
7972 If so, try to merge the shifts into a SIGN_EXTEND. We could
7973 also do this for some cases of SIGN_EXTRACT, but it doesn't
7974 seem worth the effort; the case checked for occurs on Alpha. */
7976 if (!OBJECT_P (lhs)
7977 && ! (GET_CODE (lhs) == SUBREG
7978 && (OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (lhs))))
7979 && CONST_INT_P (rhs)
7980 && INTVAL (rhs) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7981 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width
7982 && (new_rtx = extract_left_shift (lhs, INTVAL (rhs))) != 0)
7983 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, make_compound_operation (new_rtx, next_code),
7984 0, NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
7985 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7987 break;
7989 case SUBREG:
7990 /* Call ourselves recursively on the inner expression. If we are
7991 narrowing the object and it has a different RTL code from
7992 what it originally did, do this SUBREG as a force_to_mode. */
7994 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (x), simplified;
7995 enum rtx_code subreg_code = in_code;
7997 /* If in_code is COMPARE, it isn't always safe to pass it through
7998 to the recursive make_compound_operation call. */
7999 if (subreg_code == COMPARE
8000 && (!subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8001 || GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG
8002 /* (subreg:SI (and:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 0x800000000)) 0)
8003 is (const_int 0), rather than
8004 (subreg:SI (lshiftrt:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 35)) 0). */
8005 || (GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8006 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
8007 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8008 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
8009 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))))
8010 subreg_code = SET;
8012 tem = make_compound_operation (inner, subreg_code);
8014 simplified
8015 = simplify_subreg (mode, tem, GET_MODE (inner), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
8016 if (simplified)
8017 tem = simplified;
8019 if (GET_CODE (tem) != GET_CODE (inner)
8020 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8021 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
8023 rtx newer
8024 = force_to_mode (tem, mode, ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, 0);
8026 /* If we have something other than a SUBREG, we might have
8027 done an expansion, so rerun ourselves. */
8028 if (GET_CODE (newer) != SUBREG)
8029 newer = make_compound_operation (newer, in_code);
8031 /* force_to_mode can expand compounds. If it just re-expanded the
8032 compound, use gen_lowpart to convert to the desired mode. */
8033 if (rtx_equal_p (newer, x)
8034 /* Likewise if it re-expanded the compound only partially.
8035 This happens for SUBREG of ZERO_EXTRACT if they extract
8036 the same number of bits. */
8037 || (GET_CODE (newer) == SUBREG
8038 && (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == LSHIFTRT
8039 || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == ASHIFTRT)
8040 && GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8041 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (newer), XEXP (inner, 0))))
8042 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), tem);
8044 return newer;
8047 if (simplified)
8048 return tem;
8050 break;
8052 default:
8053 break;
8056 if (new_rtx)
8058 x = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
8059 code = GET_CODE (x);
8062 /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. We need to
8063 handle ZERO_EXTEND specially so that we don't lose track of the
8064 inner mode. */
8065 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
8067 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
8068 tem = simplify_const_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
8069 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8070 if (tem)
8071 return tem;
8072 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx);
8073 return x;
8076 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8077 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
8078 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8080 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, i), next_code);
8081 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
8083 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8084 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8086 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XVECEXP (x, i, j), next_code);
8087 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
8090 maybe_swap:
8091 /* If this is a commutative operation, the changes to the operands
8092 may have made it noncanonical. */
8093 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x)
8094 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
8096 tem = XEXP (x, 0);
8097 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
8098 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem);
8101 return x;
8104 /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits
8105 within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not.
8106 Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the
8107 low-order bit.
8109 *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */
8111 static int
8112 get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *plen)
8114 /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */
8115 int pos = m ? ctz_hwi (m) : -1;
8116 int len = 0;
8118 if (pos >= 0)
8119 /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a
8120 power of two minus 1. */
8121 len = exact_log2 ((m >> pos) + 1);
8123 if (len <= 0)
8124 pos = -1;
8126 *plen = len;
8127 return pos;
8130 /* If X refers to a register that equals REG in value, replace these
8131 references with REG. */
8132 static rtx
8133 canon_reg_for_combine (rtx x, rtx reg)
8135 rtx op0, op1, op2;
8136 const char *fmt;
8137 int i;
8138 bool copied;
8140 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8141 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
8143 case RTX_UNARY:
8144 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8145 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8146 return simplify_gen_unary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0,
8147 GET_MODE (reg));
8148 break;
8150 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
8151 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
8152 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8153 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8154 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8155 return simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0, op1);
8156 break;
8158 case RTX_COMPARE:
8159 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
8160 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8161 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8162 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8163 return simplify_gen_relational (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8164 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1);
8165 break;
8167 case RTX_TERNARY:
8168 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
8169 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8170 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8171 op2 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 2), reg);
8172 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1) || op2 != XEXP (x, 2))
8173 return simplify_gen_ternary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8174 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1, op2);
8176 case RTX_OBJ:
8177 if (REG_P (x))
8179 if (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg), x)
8180 || rtx_equal_p (reg, get_last_value (x)))
8181 return reg;
8182 else
8183 break;
8186 /* fall through */
8188 default:
8189 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8190 copied = false;
8191 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8192 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8194 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, i), reg);
8195 if (op != XEXP (x, i))
8197 if (!copied)
8199 copied = true;
8200 x = copy_rtx (x);
8202 XEXP (x, i) = op;
8205 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8207 int j;
8208 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8210 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j), reg);
8211 if (op != XVECEXP (x, i, j))
8213 if (!copied)
8215 copied = true;
8216 x = copy_rtx (x);
8218 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = op;
8223 break;
8226 return x;
8229 /* Return X converted to MODE. If the value is already truncated to
8230 MODE we can just return a subreg even though in the general case we
8231 would need an explicit truncation. */
8233 static rtx
8234 gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode mode, rtx x)
8236 if (!CONST_INT_P (x)
8237 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8238 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, GET_MODE (x))
8239 && !(REG_P (x) && reg_truncated_to_mode (mode, x)))
8241 /* Bit-cast X into an integer mode. */
8242 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8243 x = gen_lowpart (int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (x)), x);
8244 x = simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, int_mode_for_mode (mode),
8245 x, GET_MODE (x));
8248 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8251 /* See if X can be simplified knowing that we will only refer to it in
8252 MODE and will only refer to those bits that are nonzero in MASK.
8253 If other bits are being computed or if masking operations are done
8254 that select a superset of the bits in MASK, they can sometimes be
8255 ignored.
8257 Return a possibly simplified expression, but always convert X to
8258 MODE. If X is a CONST_INT, AND the CONST_INT with MASK.
8260 If JUST_SELECT is nonzero, don't optimize by noticing that bits in MASK
8261 are all off in X. This is used when X will be complemented, by either
8262 NOT, NEG, or XOR. */
8264 static rtx
8265 force_to_mode (rtx x, machine_mode mode, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask,
8266 int just_select)
8268 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8269 int next_select = just_select || code == XOR || code == NOT || code == NEG;
8270 machine_mode op_mode;
8271 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fuller_mask, nonzero;
8272 rtx op0, op1, temp;
8274 /* If this is a CALL or ASM_OPERANDS, don't do anything. Some of the
8275 code below will do the wrong thing since the mode of such an
8276 expression is VOIDmode.
8278 Also do nothing if X is a CLOBBER; this can happen if X was
8279 the return value from a call to gen_lowpart. */
8280 if (code == CALL || code == ASM_OPERANDS || code == CLOBBER)
8281 return x;
8283 /* We want to perform the operation in its present mode unless we know
8284 that the operation is valid in MODE, in which case we do the operation
8285 in MODE. */
8286 op_mode = ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x))
8287 && have_insn_for (code, mode))
8288 ? mode : GET_MODE (x));
8290 /* It is not valid to do a right-shift in a narrower mode
8291 than the one it came in with. */
8292 if ((code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
8293 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8294 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8296 /* Truncate MASK to fit OP_MODE. */
8297 if (op_mode)
8298 mask &= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
8300 /* When we have an arithmetic operation, or a shift whose count we
8301 do not know, we need to assume that all bits up to the highest-order
8302 bit in MASK will be needed. This is how we form such a mask. */
8303 if (mask & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1)))
8304 fuller_mask = ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0;
8305 else
8306 fuller_mask = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8307 - 1);
8309 /* Determine what bits of X are guaranteed to be (non)zero. */
8310 nonzero = nonzero_bits (x, mode);
8312 /* If none of the bits in X are needed, return a zero. */
8313 if (!just_select && (nonzero & mask) == 0 && !side_effects_p (x))
8314 x = const0_rtx;
8316 /* If X is a CONST_INT, return a new one. Do this here since the
8317 test below will fail. */
8318 if (CONST_INT_P (x))
8320 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
8321 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (x) & mask, mode);
8322 else
8324 x = GEN_INT (INTVAL (x) & mask);
8325 return gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
8329 /* If X is narrower than MODE and we want all the bits in X's mode, just
8330 get X in the proper mode. */
8331 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
8332 && (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask) == 0)
8333 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8335 /* We can ignore the effect of a SUBREG if it narrows the mode or
8336 if the constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */
8337 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
8338 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8339 && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8340 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
8341 || (0 == (mask
8342 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))
8343 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))))
8344 return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x), mode, mask, next_select);
8346 /* The arithmetic simplifications here only work for scalar integer modes. */
8347 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode) || !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8348 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8350 switch (code)
8352 case CLOBBER:
8353 /* If X is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know we are
8354 generating something that won't match. */
8355 return x;
8357 case SIGN_EXTEND:
8358 case ZERO_EXTEND:
8359 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
8360 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
8361 x = expand_compound_operation (x);
8362 if (GET_CODE (x) != code)
8363 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8364 break;
8366 case TRUNCATE:
8367 /* Similarly for a truncate. */
8368 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8370 case AND:
8371 /* If this is an AND with a constant, convert it into an AND
8372 whose constant is the AND of that constant with MASK. If it
8373 remains an AND of MASK, delete it since it is redundant. */
8375 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
8377 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, op_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
8378 mask & INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8380 /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that
8381 is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is MASK, we don't
8382 need it. */
8384 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8385 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)))
8386 == mask))
8387 x = XEXP (x, 0);
8389 /* If it remains an AND, try making another AND with the bits
8390 in the mode mask that aren't in MASK turned on. If the
8391 constant in the AND is wide enough, this might make a
8392 cheaper constant. */
8394 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8395 && GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) != mask
8396 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8398 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cval
8399 = UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8400 | (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask);
8401 rtx y;
8403 y = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8404 gen_int_mode (cval, GET_MODE (x)));
8405 if (set_src_cost (y, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
8406 < set_src_cost (x, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
8407 x = y;
8410 break;
8413 goto binop;
8415 case PLUS:
8416 /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off
8417 low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already
8418 aligned to that boundary, mask C1 to that boundary as well.
8419 This may eliminate that PLUS and, later, the AND. */
8422 unsigned int width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
8423 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT smask = mask;
8425 /* If MODE is narrower than HOST_WIDE_INT and mask is a negative
8426 number, sign extend it. */
8428 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8429 && (smask & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (width - 1))) != 0)
8430 smask |= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << width;
8432 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8433 && exact_log2 (- smask) >= 0
8434 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & ~smask) == 0
8435 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~smask) != 0)
8436 return force_to_mode (plus_constant (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8437 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & smask)),
8438 mode, smask, next_select);
8441 /* ... fall through ... */
8443 case MULT:
8444 /* For PLUS, MINUS and MULT, we need any bits less significant than the
8445 most significant bit in MASK since carries from those bits will
8446 affect the bits we are interested in. */
8447 mask = fuller_mask;
8448 goto binop;
8450 case MINUS:
8451 /* If X is (minus C Y) where C's least set bit is larger than any bit
8452 in the mask, then we may replace with (neg Y). */
8453 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8454 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)) & -UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))) > mask))
8456 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 1),
8457 GET_MODE (x));
8458 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8461 /* Similarly, if C contains every bit in the fuller_mask, then we may
8462 replace with (not Y). */
8463 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8464 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)) | fuller_mask) == UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))))
8466 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x),
8467 XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (x));
8468 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8471 mask = fuller_mask;
8472 goto binop;
8474 case IOR:
8475 case XOR:
8476 /* If X is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and
8477 LSHIFTRT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...)
8478 operation which may be a bitfield extraction. Ensure that the
8479 constant we form is not wider than the mode of X. */
8481 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8482 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8483 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8484 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8485 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8486 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8487 + floor_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))))
8488 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8489 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8490 & ~nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x))) == 0)
8492 temp = gen_int_mode ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & mask)
8493 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8494 GET_MODE (x));
8495 temp = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8496 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8497 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), temp,
8498 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8499 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8502 binop:
8503 /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and
8504 change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */
8506 op0 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8507 op1 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode, mask, next_select);
8509 /* If we ended up truncating both operands, truncate the result of the
8510 operation instead. */
8511 if (GET_CODE (op0) == TRUNCATE
8512 && GET_CODE (op1) == TRUNCATE)
8514 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
8515 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
8518 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op0);
8519 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op1);
8521 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8522 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, op1);
8523 break;
8525 case ASHIFT:
8526 /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand.
8527 However, we cannot do anything with shifts where we cannot
8528 guarantee that the counts are smaller than the size of the mode
8529 because such a count will have a different meaning in a
8530 wider mode. */
8532 if (! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8533 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8534 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
8535 && ! (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != VOIDmode
8536 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)))
8537 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))))
8538 break;
8540 /* If the shift count is a constant and we can do arithmetic in
8541 the mode of the shift, refine which bits we need. Otherwise, use the
8542 conservative form of the mask. */
8543 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8544 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8545 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op_mode)
8546 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8547 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8548 else
8549 mask = fuller_mask;
8551 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8552 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), op_mode,
8553 mask, next_select));
8555 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8556 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, XEXP (x, 1));
8557 break;
8559 case LSHIFTRT:
8560 /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant,
8561 this shift constant is valid for the host, and we can do arithmetic
8562 in OP_MODE. */
8564 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8565 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8566 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8567 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8569 rtx inner = XEXP (x, 0);
8570 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_mask;
8572 /* Select the mask of the bits we need for the shift operand. */
8573 inner_mask = mask << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8575 /* We can only change the mode of the shift if we can do arithmetic
8576 in the mode of the shift and INNER_MASK is no wider than the
8577 width of X's mode. */
8578 if ((inner_mask & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))) != 0)
8579 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8581 inner = force_to_mode (inner, op_mode, inner_mask, next_select);
8583 if (GET_MODE (x) != op_mode || inner != XEXP (x, 0))
8584 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, op_mode, inner, XEXP (x, 1));
8587 /* If we have (and (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2) where the combination of the
8588 shift and AND produces only copies of the sign bit (C2 is one less
8589 than a power of two), we can do this with just a shift. */
8591 if (GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT
8592 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8593 /* The shift puts one of the sign bit copies in the least significant
8594 bit. */
8595 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8596 + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
8597 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8598 && exact_log2 (mask + 1) >= 0
8599 /* Number of bits left after the shift must be more than the mask
8600 needs. */
8601 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + exact_log2 (mask + 1))
8602 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8603 /* Must be more sign bit copies than the mask needs. */
8604 && ((int) num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
8605 >= exact_log2 (mask + 1)))
8606 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8607 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x))
8608 - exact_log2 (mask + 1)));
8610 goto shiftrt;
8612 case ASHIFTRT:
8613 /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this shift at
8614 all, even if it has a variable count. */
8615 if (val_signbit_p (GET_MODE (x), mask))
8616 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8618 /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains those bits
8619 that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have two cases: If
8620 MASK only includes those bits, this can be a logical shift, which may
8621 allow simplifications. If MASK is a single-bit field not within
8622 those bits, we are requesting a copy of the sign bit and hence can
8623 shift the sign bit to the appropriate location. */
8625 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8626 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8628 int i;
8630 /* If the considered data is wider than HOST_WIDE_INT, we can't
8631 represent a mask for all its bits in a single scalar.
8632 But we only care about the lower bits, so calculate these. */
8634 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8636 nonzero = ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0;
8638 /* GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8639 is the number of bits a full-width mask would have set.
8640 We need only shift if these are fewer than nonzero can
8641 hold. If not, we must keep all bits set in nonzero. */
8643 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8644 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8645 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8646 + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8647 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) ;
8649 else
8651 nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
8652 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8655 if ((mask & ~nonzero) == 0)
8657 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8658 XEXP (x, 0), INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8659 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8660 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8663 else if ((i = exact_log2 (mask)) >= 0)
8665 x = simplify_shift_const
8666 (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8667 GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - 1 - i);
8669 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8670 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8674 /* If MASK is 1, convert this to an LSHIFTRT. This can be done
8675 even if the shift count isn't a constant. */
8676 if (mask == 1)
8677 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8678 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
8680 shiftrt:
8682 /* If this is a zero- or sign-extension operation that just affects bits
8683 we don't care about, remove it. Be sure the call above returned
8684 something that is still a shift. */
8686 if ((GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFTRT)
8687 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8688 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8689 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8690 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8691 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
8692 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == XEXP (x, 1))
8693 return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode, mask,
8694 next_select);
8696 break;
8698 case ROTATE:
8699 case ROTATERT:
8700 /* If the shift count is constant and we can do computations
8701 in the mode of X, compute where the bits we care about are.
8702 Otherwise, we can't do anything. Don't change the mode of
8703 the shift or propagate MODE into the shift, though. */
8704 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8705 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0)
8707 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code == ROTATE ? ROTATERT : ROTATE,
8708 GET_MODE (x),
8709 gen_int_mode (mask, GET_MODE (x)),
8710 XEXP (x, 1));
8711 if (temp && CONST_INT_P (temp))
8712 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x),
8713 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x),
8714 INTVAL (temp), next_select),
8715 XEXP (x, 1));
8717 break;
8719 case NEG:
8720 /* If we just want the low-order bit, the NEG isn't needed since it
8721 won't change the low-order bit. */
8722 if (mask == 1)
8723 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, just_select);
8725 /* We need any bits less significant than the most significant bit in
8726 MASK since carries from those bits will affect the bits we are
8727 interested in. */
8728 mask = fuller_mask;
8729 goto unop;
8731 case NOT:
8732 /* (not FOO) is (xor FOO CONST), so if FOO is an LSHIFTRT, we can do the
8733 same as the XOR case above. Ensure that the constant we form is not
8734 wider than the mode of X. */
8736 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8737 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8738 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8739 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) + floor_log2 (mask)
8740 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8741 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8743 temp = gen_int_mode (mask << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8744 GET_MODE (x));
8745 temp = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (x),
8746 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8747 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8748 temp, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8750 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8753 /* (and (not FOO) CONST) is (not (or FOO (not CONST))), so we must
8754 use the full mask inside the NOT. */
8755 mask = fuller_mask;
8757 unop:
8758 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8759 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask,
8760 next_select));
8761 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8762 x = simplify_gen_unary (code, op_mode, op0, op_mode);
8763 break;
8765 case NE:
8766 /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is included
8767 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has a single bit that might be nonzero,
8768 which is equal to STORE_FLAG_VALUE. */
8769 if ((mask & ~STORE_FLAG_VALUE) == 0
8770 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx
8771 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode
8772 && exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)) >= 0
8773 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
8774 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
8775 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8777 break;
8779 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
8780 /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be
8781 written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */
8783 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8784 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
8785 mask, next_select));
8786 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8787 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 2), mode,
8788 mask, next_select));
8789 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 1) || op1 != XEXP (x, 2))
8790 x = simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE, GET_MODE (x),
8791 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), XEXP (x, 0),
8792 op0, op1);
8793 break;
8795 default:
8796 break;
8799 /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */
8800 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8803 /* Return nonzero if X is an expression that has one of two values depending on
8804 whether some other value is zero or nonzero. In that case, we return the
8805 value that is being tested, *PTRUE is set to the value if the rtx being
8806 returned has a nonzero value, and *PFALSE is set to the other alternative.
8808 If we return zero, we set *PTRUE and *PFALSE to X. */
8810 static rtx
8811 if_then_else_cond (rtx x, rtx *ptrue, rtx *pfalse)
8813 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
8814 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8815 rtx cond0, cond1, true0, true1, false0, false1;
8816 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz;
8818 /* If we are comparing a value against zero, we are done. */
8819 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
8820 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx)
8822 *ptrue = (code == NE) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
8823 *pfalse = (code == NE) ? const0_rtx : const_true_rtx;
8824 return XEXP (x, 0);
8827 /* If this is a unary operation whose operand has one of two values, apply
8828 our opcode to compute those values. */
8829 else if (UNARY_P (x)
8830 && (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 0), &true0, &false0)) != 0)
8832 *ptrue = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, true0, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8833 *pfalse = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, false0,
8834 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8835 return cond0;
8838 /* If this is a COMPARE, do nothing, since the IF_THEN_ELSE we would
8839 make can't possibly match and would suppress other optimizations. */
8840 else if (code == COMPARE)
8843 /* If this is a binary operation, see if either side has only one of two
8844 values. If either one does or if both do and they are conditional on
8845 the same value, compute the new true and false values. */
8846 else if (BINARY_P (x))
8848 cond0 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 0), &true0, &false0);
8849 cond1 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 1), &true1, &false1);
8851 if ((cond0 != 0 || cond1 != 0)
8852 && ! (cond0 != 0 && cond1 != 0 && ! rtx_equal_p (cond0, cond1)))
8854 /* If if_then_else_cond returned zero, then true/false are the
8855 same rtl. We must copy one of them to prevent invalid rtl
8856 sharing. */
8857 if (cond0 == 0)
8858 true0 = copy_rtx (true0);
8859 else if (cond1 == 0)
8860 true1 = copy_rtx (true1);
8862 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
8864 *ptrue = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
8865 true0, true1);
8866 *pfalse = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
8867 false0, false1);
8869 else
8871 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, true0, true1);
8872 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, false0, false1);
8875 return cond0 ? cond0 : cond1;
8878 /* See if we have PLUS, IOR, XOR, MINUS or UMAX, where one of the
8879 operands is zero when the other is nonzero, and vice-versa,
8880 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or -1. */
8882 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
8883 && (code == PLUS || code == IOR || code == XOR || code == MINUS
8884 || code == UMAX)
8885 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
8887 rtx op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
8888 rtx op1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1);
8890 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
8891 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
8893 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
8894 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
8895 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
8896 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
8897 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
8898 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
8899 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
8900 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
8901 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
8902 && ! side_effects_p (x))
8904 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, op0, const_true_rtx);
8905 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode,
8906 (code == MINUS
8907 ? simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
8908 op1, mode)
8909 : op1),
8910 const_true_rtx);
8911 return cond0;
8915 /* Similarly for MULT, AND and UMIN, except that for these the result
8916 is always zero. */
8917 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
8918 && (code == MULT || code == AND || code == UMIN)
8919 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
8921 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
8922 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
8924 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
8925 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
8926 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
8927 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
8928 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
8929 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
8930 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
8931 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
8932 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
8933 && ! side_effects_p (x))
8935 *ptrue = *pfalse = const0_rtx;
8936 return cond0;
8941 else if (code == IF_THEN_ELSE)
8943 /* If we have IF_THEN_ELSE already, extract the condition and
8944 canonicalize it if it is NE or EQ. */
8945 cond0 = XEXP (x, 0);
8946 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 1), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 2);
8947 if (GET_CODE (cond0) == NE && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
8948 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
8949 else if (GET_CODE (cond0) == EQ && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
8951 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 2), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 1);
8952 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
8954 else
8955 return cond0;
8958 /* If X is a SUBREG, we can narrow both the true and false values
8959 if the inner expression, if there is a condition. */
8960 else if (code == SUBREG
8961 && 0 != (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (SUBREG_REG (x),
8962 &true0, &false0)))
8964 true0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, true0,
8965 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
8966 false0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, false0,
8967 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
8968 if (true0 && false0)
8970 *ptrue = true0;
8971 *pfalse = false0;
8972 return cond0;
8976 /* If X is a constant, this isn't special and will cause confusions
8977 if we treat it as such. Likewise if it is equivalent to a constant. */
8978 else if (CONSTANT_P (x)
8979 || ((cond0 = get_last_value (x)) != 0 && CONSTANT_P (cond0)))
8982 /* If we're in BImode, canonicalize on 0 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE, as that
8983 will be least confusing to the rest of the compiler. */
8984 else if (mode == BImode)
8986 *ptrue = GEN_INT (STORE_FLAG_VALUE), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
8987 return x;
8990 /* If X is known to be either 0 or -1, those are the true and
8991 false values when testing X. */
8992 else if (x == constm1_rtx || x == const0_rtx
8993 || (mode != VOIDmode
8994 && num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
8996 *ptrue = constm1_rtx, *pfalse = const0_rtx;
8997 return x;
9000 /* Likewise for 0 or a single bit. */
9001 else if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
9002 && exact_log2 (nz = nonzero_bits (x, mode)) >= 0)
9004 *ptrue = gen_int_mode (nz, mode), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9005 return x;
9008 /* Otherwise fail; show no condition with true and false values the same. */
9009 *ptrue = *pfalse = x;
9010 return 0;
9013 /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND
9014 is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL
9015 as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in
9016 place.
9018 We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that
9019 arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */
9021 static rtx
9022 known_cond (rtx x, enum rtx_code cond, rtx reg, rtx val)
9024 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9025 rtx temp;
9026 const char *fmt;
9027 int i, j;
9029 if (side_effects_p (x))
9030 return x;
9032 /* If either operand of the condition is a floating point value,
9033 then we have to avoid collapsing an EQ comparison. */
9034 if (cond == EQ
9035 && rtx_equal_p (x, reg)
9036 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9037 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (val)))
9038 return val;
9040 if (cond == UNEQ && rtx_equal_p (x, reg))
9041 return val;
9043 /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship
9044 with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */
9046 if (code == ABS && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && val == const0_rtx)
9047 switch (cond)
9049 case GE: case GT: case EQ:
9050 return XEXP (x, 0);
9051 case LT: case LE:
9052 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
9053 XEXP (x, 0),
9054 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
9055 default:
9056 break;
9059 /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the
9060 operands are the same as REG and VAL. */
9062 else if (COMPARISON_P (x) || COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
9064 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), val))
9065 cond = swap_condition (cond), temp = val, val = reg, reg = temp;
9067 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), val))
9069 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
9071 if (comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9072 return const_true_rtx;
9074 code = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
9075 if (code != UNKNOWN
9076 && comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9077 return const0_rtx;
9078 else
9079 return x;
9081 else if (code == SMAX || code == SMIN
9082 || code == UMIN || code == UMAX)
9084 int unsignedp = (code == UMIN || code == UMAX);
9086 /* Do not reverse the condition when it is NE or EQ.
9087 This is because we cannot conclude anything about
9088 the value of 'SMAX (x, y)' when x is not equal to y,
9089 but we can when x equals y. */
9090 if ((code == SMAX || code == UMAX)
9091 && ! (cond == EQ || cond == NE))
9092 cond = reverse_condition (cond);
9094 switch (cond)
9096 case GE: case GT:
9097 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 1);
9098 case LE: case LT:
9099 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 0);
9100 case GEU: case GTU:
9101 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 1) : x;
9102 case LEU: case LTU:
9103 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 0) : x;
9104 default:
9105 break;
9110 else if (code == SUBREG)
9112 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
9113 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (SUBREG_REG (x), cond, reg, val);
9115 if (SUBREG_REG (x) != r)
9117 /* We must simplify subreg here, before we lose track of the
9118 original inner_mode. */
9119 new_rtx = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), r,
9120 inner_mode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9121 if (new_rtx)
9122 return new_rtx;
9123 else
9124 SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x), r);
9127 return x;
9129 /* We don't have to handle SIGN_EXTEND here, because even in the
9130 case of replacing something with a modeless CONST_INT, a
9131 CONST_INT is already (supposed to be) a valid sign extension for
9132 its narrower mode, which implies it's already properly
9133 sign-extended for the wider mode. Now, for ZERO_EXTEND, the
9134 story is different. */
9135 else if (code == ZERO_EXTEND)
9137 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
9138 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (XEXP (x, 0), cond, reg, val);
9140 if (XEXP (x, 0) != r)
9142 /* We must simplify the zero_extend here, before we lose
9143 track of the original inner_mode. */
9144 new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
9145 r, inner_mode);
9146 if (new_rtx)
9147 return new_rtx;
9148 else
9149 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), r);
9152 return x;
9155 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
9156 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
9158 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
9159 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), known_cond (XEXP (x, i), cond, reg, val));
9160 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
9161 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
9162 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), known_cond (XVECEXP (x, i, j),
9163 cond, reg, val));
9166 return x;
9169 /* See if X and Y are equal for the purposes of seeing if we can rewrite an
9170 assignment as a field assignment. */
9172 static int
9173 rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx x, rtx y, bool widen_x)
9175 if (widen_x && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9177 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (y)))
9178 return 0;
9179 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
9180 return 0;
9181 /* For big endian, adjust the memory offset. */
9182 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
9183 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y),
9184 -subreg_lowpart_offset (GET_MODE (x),
9185 GET_MODE (y)));
9186 else
9187 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y), 0);
9190 if (x == y || rtx_equal_p (x, y))
9191 return 1;
9193 if (x == 0 || y == 0 || GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9194 return 0;
9196 /* Check for a paradoxical SUBREG of a MEM compared with the MEM.
9197 Note that all SUBREGs of MEM are paradoxical; otherwise they
9198 would have been rewritten. */
9199 if (MEM_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG
9200 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (y))
9201 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (y),
9202 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y)), x)))
9203 return 1;
9205 if (MEM_P (y) && GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
9206 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
9207 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (x),
9208 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), y)))
9209 return 1;
9211 /* We used to see if get_last_value of X and Y were the same but that's
9212 not correct. In one direction, we'll cause the assignment to have
9213 the wrong destination and in the case, we'll import a register into this
9214 insn that might have already have been dead. So fail if none of the
9215 above cases are true. */
9216 return 0;
9219 /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment.
9220 Return that assignment if so.
9222 We only handle the most common cases. */
9224 static rtx
9225 make_field_assignment (rtx x)
9227 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
9228 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
9229 rtx assign;
9230 rtx rhs, lhs;
9231 HOST_WIDE_INT c1;
9232 HOST_WIDE_INT pos;
9233 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
9234 rtx other;
9235 machine_mode mode;
9237 /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is
9238 a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to
9239 (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check
9240 for a SUBREG. */
9242 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ROTATE
9243 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
9244 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)) == -2
9245 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9247 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9248 1, 1, 1, 0);
9249 if (assign != 0)
9250 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, assign, const0_rtx);
9251 return x;
9254 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == SUBREG
9255 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src, 0))
9256 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)))
9257 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)))))
9258 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0))) == ROTATE
9259 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0))
9260 && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0)) == -2
9261 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9263 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0,
9264 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 1),
9265 1, 1, 1, 0);
9266 if (assign != 0)
9267 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, assign, const0_rtx);
9268 return x;
9271 /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS) DEST), this is a set of a
9272 one-bit field. */
9273 if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ASHIFT
9274 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
9275 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9277 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9278 1, 1, 1, 0);
9279 if (assign != 0)
9280 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, assign, const1_rtx);
9281 return x;
9284 /* If DEST is already a field assignment, i.e. ZERO_EXTRACT, and the
9285 SRC is an AND with all bits of that field set, then we can discard
9286 the AND. */
9287 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9288 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
9289 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9290 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
9292 HOST_WIDE_INT width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
9293 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT and_mask = INTVAL (XEXP (src, 1));
9294 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ze_mask;
9296 if (width >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
9297 ze_mask = -1;
9298 else
9299 ze_mask = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << width) - 1;
9301 /* Complete overlap. We can remove the source AND. */
9302 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) == ze_mask)
9303 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, XEXP (src, 0));
9305 /* Partial overlap. We can reduce the source AND. */
9306 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) != and_mask)
9308 mode = GET_MODE (src);
9309 src = gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (src, 0),
9310 gen_int_mode (and_mask & ze_mask, mode));
9311 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, src);
9315 /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position
9316 field. They look like (ior/xor (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents
9317 a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and
9318 OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an
9319 assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER
9320 to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and
9321 make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */
9323 /* One or more SUBREGs might obscure the constant-position field
9324 assignment. The first one we are likely to encounter is an outer
9325 narrowing SUBREG, which we can just strip for the purposes of
9326 identifying the constant-field assignment. */
9327 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src))
9328 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
9330 if (GET_CODE (src) != IOR && GET_CODE (src) != XOR)
9331 return x;
9333 rhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 0));
9334 lhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 1));
9336 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9337 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9338 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (rhs, 0), dest))
9339 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9340 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9341 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9342 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9343 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9344 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9345 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9346 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9347 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (rhs, 0))
9348 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9349 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9350 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)),
9351 dest, true))
9352 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9353 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9354 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9355 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), dest))
9356 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9357 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9358 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9359 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9360 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9361 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9362 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9363 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9364 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (lhs, 0))
9365 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)))
9366 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9367 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)),
9368 dest, true))
9369 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9370 else
9371 return x;
9373 pos = get_pos_from_mask ((~c1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (dest)), &len);
9374 if (pos < 0 || pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest))
9375 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9376 || (c1 & nonzero_bits (other, GET_MODE (dest))) != 0)
9377 return x;
9379 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, pos, NULL_RTX, len, 1, 1, 0);
9380 if (assign == 0)
9381 return x;
9383 /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of
9384 what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */
9385 mode = (GET_CODE (assign) == STRICT_LOW_PART
9386 ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign));
9388 /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it
9389 to the proper length and mode. */
9391 src = canon_reg_for_combine (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
9392 GET_MODE (src),
9393 other, pos),
9394 dest);
9395 src = force_to_mode (src, mode,
9396 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9397 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
9398 : ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
9401 /* If SRC is masked by an AND that does not make a difference in
9402 the value being stored, strip it. */
9403 if (GET_CODE (assign) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9404 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (assign, 1))
9405 && INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9406 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9407 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
9408 && UINTVAL (XEXP (src, 1))
9409 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1))) - 1)
9410 src = XEXP (src, 0);
9412 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, assign, src);
9415 /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c)
9416 if so. */
9418 static rtx
9419 apply_distributive_law (rtx x)
9421 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9422 enum rtx_code inner_code;
9423 rtx lhs, rhs, other;
9424 rtx tem;
9426 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9427 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9428 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9429 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9430 return x;
9432 /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */
9433 if (code != IOR && code != AND && code != XOR
9434 && code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9435 return x;
9437 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
9438 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
9440 /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out
9441 fast. */
9442 if (OBJECT_P (lhs) || OBJECT_P (rhs))
9443 return x;
9445 lhs = expand_compound_operation (lhs);
9446 rhs = expand_compound_operation (rhs);
9447 inner_code = GET_CODE (lhs);
9448 if (inner_code != GET_CODE (rhs))
9449 return x;
9451 /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */
9452 switch (inner_code)
9454 case LSHIFTRT:
9455 case ASHIFTRT:
9456 case AND:
9457 case IOR:
9458 /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */
9459 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
9460 return x;
9461 break;
9463 case MULT:
9464 if (code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9465 return x;
9466 break;
9468 case ASHIFT:
9469 /* This is also a multiply, so it distributes over everything. */
9470 break;
9472 /* This used to handle SUBREG, but this turned out to be counter-
9473 productive, since (subreg (op ...)) usually is not handled by
9474 insn patterns, and this "optimization" therefore transformed
9475 recognizable patterns into unrecognizable ones. Therefore the
9476 SUBREG case was removed from here.
9478 It is possible that distributing SUBREG over arithmetic operations
9479 leads to an intermediate result than can then be optimized further,
9480 e.g. by moving the outer SUBREG to the other side of a SET as done
9481 in simplify_set. This seems to have been the original intent of
9482 handling SUBREGs here.
9484 However, with current GCC this does not appear to actually happen,
9485 at least on major platforms. If some case is found where removing
9486 the SUBREG case here prevents follow-on optimizations, distributing
9487 SUBREGs ought to be re-added at that place, e.g. in simplify_set. */
9489 default:
9490 return x;
9493 /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example
9494 above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example).
9495 There is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is
9496 commutative. */
9497 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9498 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9499 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9500 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9501 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9502 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9503 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9504 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9505 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9506 else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9507 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9508 else
9509 return x;
9511 /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */
9512 tem = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x), lhs, rhs);
9514 /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing:
9515 (a | c) ^ (b | c) -> (a ^ b) & ~c */
9516 if (code == XOR && inner_code == IOR)
9518 inner_code = AND;
9519 other = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x), other, GET_MODE (x));
9522 /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call
9523 ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the
9524 outer operation, which we return. */
9525 return simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, GET_MODE (x),
9526 apply_distributive_law (tem), other);
9529 /* See if X is of the form (* (+ A B) C), and if so convert to
9530 (+ (* A C) (* B C)) and try to simplify.
9532 Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of
9533 the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications
9534 will result.
9536 For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of
9537 expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive
9538 law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))),
9539 which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))).
9541 Note that no checks happen on the validity of applying the inverse
9542 distributive law. This is pointless since we can do it in the
9543 few places where this routine is called.
9545 N is the index of the term that is decomposed (the arithmetic operation,
9546 i.e. (+ A B) in the first example above). !N is the index of the term that
9547 is distributed, i.e. of C in the first example above. */
9548 static rtx
9549 distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx x, int n)
9551 machine_mode mode;
9552 enum rtx_code outer_code, inner_code;
9553 rtx decomposed, distributed, inner_op0, inner_op1, new_op0, new_op1, tmp;
9555 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9556 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9557 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9558 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9559 return NULL_RTX;
9561 decomposed = XEXP (x, n);
9562 if (!ARITHMETIC_P (decomposed))
9563 return NULL_RTX;
9565 mode = GET_MODE (x);
9566 outer_code = GET_CODE (x);
9567 distributed = XEXP (x, !n);
9569 inner_code = GET_CODE (decomposed);
9570 inner_op0 = XEXP (decomposed, 0);
9571 inner_op1 = XEXP (decomposed, 1);
9573 /* Special case (and (xor B C) (not A)), which is equivalent to
9574 (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */
9575 if (outer_code == AND && inner_code == XOR && GET_CODE (distributed) == NOT)
9577 distributed = XEXP (distributed, 0);
9578 outer_code = IOR;
9581 if (n == 0)
9583 /* Distribute the second term. */
9584 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op0, distributed);
9585 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op1, distributed);
9587 else
9589 /* Distribute the first term. */
9590 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op0);
9591 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op1);
9594 tmp = apply_distributive_law (simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, mode,
9595 new_op0, new_op1));
9596 if (GET_CODE (tmp) != outer_code
9597 && (set_src_cost (tmp, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
9598 < set_src_cost (x, optimize_this_for_speed_p)))
9599 return tmp;
9601 return NULL_RTX;
9604 /* Simplify a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9605 in MODE. Return an equivalent form, if different from (and VAROP
9606 (const_int CONSTOP)). Otherwise, return NULL_RTX. */
9608 static rtx
9609 simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9610 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9612 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero;
9613 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT orig_constop;
9614 rtx orig_varop;
9615 int i;
9617 orig_varop = varop;
9618 orig_constop = constop;
9619 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9620 return NULL_RTX;
9622 /* Simplify VAROP knowing that we will be only looking at some of the
9623 bits in it.
9625 Note by passing in CONSTOP, we guarantee that the bits not set in
9626 CONSTOP are not significant and will never be examined. We must
9627 ensure that is the case by explicitly masking out those bits
9628 before returning. */
9629 varop = force_to_mode (varop, mode, constop, 0);
9631 /* If VAROP is a CLOBBER, we will fail so return it. */
9632 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9633 return varop;
9635 /* If VAROP is a CONST_INT, then we need to apply the mask in CONSTOP
9636 to VAROP and return the new constant. */
9637 if (CONST_INT_P (varop))
9638 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (varop) & constop, mode);
9640 /* See what bits may be nonzero in VAROP. Unlike the general case of
9641 a call to nonzero_bits, here we don't care about bits outside
9642 MODE. */
9644 nonzero = nonzero_bits (varop, mode) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9646 /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero.
9647 Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == NONZERO_BITS
9648 which is tested below. */
9650 constop &= nonzero;
9652 /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */
9653 if (constop == 0)
9654 return const0_rtx;
9656 /* If VAROP is a NEG of something known to be zero or 1 and CONSTOP is
9657 a power of two, we can replace this with an ASHIFT. */
9658 if (GET_CODE (varop) == NEG && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), mode) == 1
9659 && (i = exact_log2 (constop)) >= 0)
9660 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), i);
9662 /* If VAROP is an IOR or XOR, apply the AND to both branches of the IOR
9663 or XOR, then try to apply the distributive law. This may eliminate
9664 operations if either branch can be simplified because of the AND.
9665 It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases probably
9666 won't match a pattern either with or without this. */
9668 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR || GET_CODE (varop) == XOR)
9669 return
9670 gen_lowpart
9671 (mode,
9672 apply_distributive_law
9673 (simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), GET_MODE (varop),
9674 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9675 GET_MODE (varop),
9676 XEXP (varop, 0),
9677 constop),
9678 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9679 GET_MODE (varop),
9680 XEXP (varop, 1),
9681 constop))));
9683 /* If VAROP is PLUS, and the constant is a mask of low bits, distribute
9684 the AND and see if one of the operands simplifies to zero. If so, we
9685 may eliminate it. */
9687 if (GET_CODE (varop) == PLUS
9688 && exact_log2 (constop + 1) >= 0)
9690 rtx o0, o1;
9692 o0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constop);
9693 o1 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 1), constop);
9694 if (o0 == const0_rtx)
9695 return o1;
9696 if (o1 == const0_rtx)
9697 return o0;
9700 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
9701 varop = gen_lowpart (mode, varop);
9702 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9703 return NULL_RTX;
9705 /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */
9706 if (constop == nonzero)
9707 return varop;
9709 if (varop == orig_varop && constop == orig_constop)
9710 return NULL_RTX;
9712 /* Otherwise, return an AND. */
9713 return simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode, varop, gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9717 /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9718 in MODE.
9720 Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If
9721 X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */
9723 static rtx
9724 simplify_and_const_int (rtx x, machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9725 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9727 rtx tem = simplify_and_const_int_1 (mode, varop, constop);
9728 if (tem)
9729 return tem;
9731 if (!x)
9732 x = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (varop), varop,
9733 gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9734 if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
9735 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
9736 return x;
9739 /* Given a REG, X, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
9740 We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
9742 For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
9743 a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */
9745 static rtx
9746 reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
9747 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9748 machine_mode known_mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9749 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9750 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *nonzero)
9752 rtx tem;
9753 reg_stat_type *rsp;
9755 /* If X is a register whose nonzero bits value is current, use it.
9756 Otherwise, if X is a register whose value we can find, use that
9757 value. Otherwise, use the previously-computed global nonzero bits
9758 for this register. */
9760 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
9761 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
9762 && (rsp->last_set_mode == mode
9763 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (rsp->last_set_mode) == MODE_INT
9764 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT))
9765 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
9766 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
9767 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
9768 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
9769 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
9770 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
9771 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
9772 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
9773 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
9774 REGNO (x)))))
9776 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits;
9778 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (rsp->last_set_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9779 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
9780 mask |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (rsp->last_set_mode);
9782 *nonzero &= mask;
9783 return NULL;
9786 tem = get_last_value (x);
9788 if (tem)
9790 #ifdef SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
9791 /* If X is narrower than MODE and TEM is a non-negative
9792 constant that would appear negative in the mode of X,
9793 sign-extend it for use in reg_nonzero_bits because some
9794 machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension
9795 and this is the conservative approach.
9797 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard
9798 instead of this kludge. */
9800 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
9801 && CONST_INT_P (tem)
9802 && INTVAL (tem) > 0
9803 && val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (x), INTVAL (tem)))
9804 tem = GEN_INT (INTVAL (tem) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)));
9805 #endif
9806 return tem;
9808 else if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->nonzero_bits)
9810 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = rsp->nonzero_bits;
9812 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9813 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
9814 mask |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
9816 *nonzero &= mask;
9819 return NULL;
9822 /* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to
9823 be equal to the sign bit. X will be used in mode MODE; if MODE is
9824 VOIDmode, X will be used in its own mode. The returned value will always
9825 be between 1 and the number of bits in MODE. */
9827 static rtx
9828 reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
9829 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9830 machine_mode known_mode
9831 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9832 unsigned int known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9833 unsigned int *result)
9835 rtx tem;
9836 reg_stat_type *rsp;
9838 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
9839 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
9840 && rsp->last_set_mode == mode
9841 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
9842 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
9843 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
9844 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
9845 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
9846 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
9847 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
9848 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
9849 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
9850 REGNO (x)))))
9852 *result = rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies;
9853 return NULL;
9856 tem = get_last_value (x);
9857 if (tem != 0)
9858 return tem;
9860 if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->sign_bit_copies != 0
9861 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9862 *result = rsp->sign_bit_copies;
9864 return NULL;
9867 /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted
9868 as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For
9869 unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits.
9870 For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit
9871 minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare"
9872 bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns
9873 at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow.
9875 This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which
9876 implies that it must be called from a define_split. */
9878 unsigned int
9879 extended_count (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int unsignedp)
9881 if (nonzero_sign_valid == 0)
9882 return 0;
9884 return (unsignedp
9885 ? (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
9886 ? (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1
9887 - floor_log2 (nonzero_bits (x, mode)))
9888 : 0)
9889 : num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) - 1);
9892 /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two
9893 outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need
9894 to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost
9895 position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1
9896 (with *POP0 being done last).
9898 Return 1 if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with
9899 the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to 1 if we would need to
9900 complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged.
9902 MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside
9903 the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode
9904 is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT.
9906 If *POP0 or OP1 are UNKNOWN, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS,
9907 IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper
9908 result is simply *PCONST0.
9910 If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we
9911 return 0 and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */
9913 static int
9914 merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *pop0, HOST_WIDE_INT *pconst0, enum rtx_code op1, HOST_WIDE_INT const1, machine_mode mode, int *pcomp_p)
9916 enum rtx_code op0 = *pop0;
9917 HOST_WIDE_INT const0 = *pconst0;
9919 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9920 const1 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9922 /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */
9923 if (op0 == AND)
9924 const1 &= const0;
9926 /* If OP0 or OP1 is UNKNOWN, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or
9927 if OP0 is SET. */
9929 if (op1 == UNKNOWN || op0 == SET)
9930 return 1;
9932 else if (op0 == UNKNOWN)
9933 op0 = op1, const0 = const1;
9935 else if (op0 == op1)
9937 switch (op0)
9939 case AND:
9940 const0 &= const1;
9941 break;
9942 case IOR:
9943 const0 |= const1;
9944 break;
9945 case XOR:
9946 const0 ^= const1;
9947 break;
9948 case PLUS:
9949 const0 += const1;
9950 break;
9951 case NEG:
9952 op0 = UNKNOWN;
9953 break;
9954 default:
9955 break;
9959 /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */
9960 else if (op0 == PLUS || op1 == PLUS || op0 == NEG || op1 == NEG)
9961 return 0;
9963 /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The
9964 remaining six cases can all be done. */
9965 else if (const0 != const1)
9966 return 0;
9968 else
9969 switch (op0)
9971 case IOR:
9972 if (op1 == AND)
9973 /* (a & b) | b == b */
9974 op0 = SET;
9975 else /* op1 == XOR */
9976 /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */
9978 break;
9980 case XOR:
9981 if (op1 == AND)
9982 /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */
9983 op0 = AND, *pcomp_p = 1;
9984 else /* op1 == IOR */
9985 /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */
9986 op0 = AND, const0 = ~const0;
9987 break;
9989 case AND:
9990 if (op1 == IOR)
9991 /* (a | b) & b == b */
9992 op0 = SET;
9993 else /* op1 == XOR */
9994 /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */
9995 *pcomp_p = 1;
9996 break;
9997 default:
9998 break;
10001 /* Check for NO-OP cases. */
10002 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
10003 if (const0 == 0
10004 && (op0 == IOR || op0 == XOR || op0 == PLUS))
10005 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10006 else if (const0 == 0 && op0 == AND)
10007 op0 = SET;
10008 else if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const0 == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10009 && op0 == AND)
10010 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10012 *pop0 = op0;
10014 /* ??? Slightly redundant with the above mask, but not entirely.
10015 Moving this above means we'd have to sign-extend the mode mask
10016 for the final test. */
10017 if (op0 != UNKNOWN && op0 != NEG)
10018 *pconst0 = trunc_int_for_mode (const0, mode);
10020 return 1;
10023 /* A helper to simplify_shift_const_1 to determine the mode we can perform
10024 the shift in. The original shift operation CODE is performed on OP in
10025 ORIG_MODE. Return the wider mode MODE if we can perform the operation
10026 in that mode. Return ORIG_MODE otherwise. We can also assume that the
10027 result of the shift is subject to operation OUTER_CODE with operand
10028 OUTER_CONST. */
10030 static machine_mode
10031 try_widen_shift_mode (enum rtx_code code, rtx op, int count,
10032 machine_mode orig_mode, machine_mode mode,
10033 enum rtx_code outer_code, HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const)
10035 if (orig_mode == mode)
10036 return mode;
10037 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode));
10039 /* In general we can't perform in wider mode for right shift and rotate. */
10040 switch (code)
10042 case ASHIFTRT:
10043 /* We can still widen if the bits brought in from the left are identical
10044 to the sign bit of ORIG_MODE. */
10045 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op, mode)
10046 > (unsigned) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
10047 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode)))
10048 return mode;
10049 return orig_mode;
10051 case LSHIFTRT:
10052 /* Similarly here but with zero bits. */
10053 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10054 && (nonzero_bits (op, mode) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (orig_mode)) == 0)
10055 return mode;
10057 /* We can also widen if the bits brought in will be masked off. This
10058 operation is performed in ORIG_MODE. */
10059 if (outer_code == AND)
10061 int care_bits = low_bitmask_len (orig_mode, outer_const);
10063 if (care_bits >= 0
10064 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode) - care_bits >= count)
10065 return mode;
10067 /* fall through */
10069 case ROTATE:
10070 return orig_mode;
10072 case ROTATERT:
10073 gcc_unreachable ();
10075 default:
10076 return mode;
10080 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by ORIG_COUNT bits. CODE says what kind
10081 of shift. The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. Return NULL_RTX
10082 if we cannot simplify it. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10084 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10085 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10086 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10088 static rtx
10089 simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
10090 rtx varop, int orig_count)
10092 enum rtx_code orig_code = code;
10093 rtx orig_varop = varop;
10094 int count;
10095 machine_mode mode = result_mode;
10096 machine_mode shift_mode, tmode;
10097 unsigned int mode_words
10098 = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
10099 /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */
10100 enum rtx_code outer_op = UNKNOWN;
10101 HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const = 0;
10102 int complement_p = 0;
10103 rtx new_rtx, x;
10105 /* Make sure and truncate the "natural" shift on the way in. We don't
10106 want to do this inside the loop as it makes it more difficult to
10107 combine shifts. */
10108 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
10109 orig_count &= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1;
10111 /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly
10112 what was requested. */
10114 if (orig_count < 0 || orig_count >= (int) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
10115 return NULL_RTX;
10117 count = orig_count;
10119 /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue',
10120 we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */
10122 while (count != 0)
10124 /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), fail. */
10125 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
10126 return NULL_RTX;
10128 /* Convert ROTATERT to ROTATE. */
10129 if (code == ROTATERT)
10131 unsigned int bitsize = GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode);
10132 code = ROTATE;
10133 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (result_mode))
10134 count = bitsize / GET_MODE_NUNITS (result_mode) - count;
10135 else
10136 count = bitsize - count;
10139 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode,
10140 mode, outer_op, outer_const);
10142 /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode
10143 minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can
10144 occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates,
10145 take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is
10146 zero.
10148 Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining
10149 multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the
10150 result is supposed to be. */
10152 if (count > (GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1))
10154 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
10155 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1;
10156 else if (code == ROTATE || code == ROTATERT)
10157 count %= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode);
10158 else
10160 /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an
10161 outer op. */
10162 varop = const0_rtx;
10163 count = 0;
10164 break;
10168 /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT
10169 here would cause an infinite loop. */
10170 if (complement_p)
10171 break;
10173 /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0
10174 is a no-op. */
10175 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10176 && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_mode)
10177 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode)))
10179 count = 0;
10180 break;
10183 /* If we are doing an arithmetic right shift and discarding all but
10184 the sign bit copies, this is equivalent to doing a shift by the
10185 bitsize minus one. Convert it into that shift because it will often
10186 allow other simplifications. */
10188 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10189 && (count + num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_mode)
10190 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode)))
10191 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1;
10193 /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting
10194 ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear.
10195 `make_compound_operation' will convert it to an ASHIFTRT for
10196 those machines (such as VAX) that don't have an LSHIFTRT. */
10197 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10198 && val_signbit_known_clear_p (shift_mode,
10199 nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode)))
10200 code = LSHIFTRT;
10202 if (((code == LSHIFTRT
10203 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_mode)
10204 && !(nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode) >> count))
10205 || (code == ASHIFT
10206 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_mode)
10207 && !((nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode) << count)
10208 & GET_MODE_MASK (shift_mode))))
10209 && !side_effects_p (varop))
10210 varop = const0_rtx;
10212 switch (GET_CODE (varop))
10214 case SIGN_EXTEND:
10215 case ZERO_EXTEND:
10216 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
10217 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
10218 new_rtx = expand_compound_operation (varop);
10219 if (new_rtx != varop)
10221 varop = new_rtx;
10222 continue;
10224 break;
10226 case MEM:
10227 /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH
10228 minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a
10229 SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */
10230 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10231 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop, 0),
10232 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (varop))
10233 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop)
10234 && (tmode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - count,
10235 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode)
10237 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (varop, tmode,
10238 BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? 0
10239 : count / BITS_PER_UNIT);
10241 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code == ASHIFTRT ? SIGN_EXTEND
10242 : ZERO_EXTEND, mode, new_rtx);
10243 count = 0;
10244 continue;
10246 break;
10248 case SUBREG:
10249 /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has
10250 the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store
10251 the widest mode in MODE. */
10252 if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop)
10253 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10254 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)))
10255 && (unsigned int) ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10256 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
10257 == mode_words
10258 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (varop)) == MODE_INT
10259 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))) == MODE_INT)
10261 varop = SUBREG_REG (varop);
10262 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
10263 mode = GET_MODE (varop);
10264 continue;
10266 break;
10268 case MULT:
10269 /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT
10270 is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to
10271 merge two shifts into one. */
10272 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10273 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10275 varop
10276 = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, GET_MODE (varop),
10277 XEXP (varop, 0),
10278 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10279 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10280 continue;
10282 break;
10284 case UDIV:
10285 /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */
10286 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10287 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10289 varop
10290 = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop),
10291 XEXP (varop, 0),
10292 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10293 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10294 continue;
10296 break;
10298 case ASHIFTRT:
10299 /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic
10300 right shift, that shift is not needed. However, the sign
10301 bit of a wider mode may be different from what would be
10302 interpreted as the sign bit in a narrower mode, so, if
10303 the result is narrower, don't discard the shift. */
10304 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10305 && count == (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1)
10306 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode)
10307 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop))))
10309 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10310 continue;
10313 /* ... fall through ... */
10315 case LSHIFTRT:
10316 case ASHIFT:
10317 case ROTATE:
10318 /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the
10319 AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */
10320 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10321 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) >= 0
10322 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))
10323 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10324 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10325 && !VECTOR_MODE_P (result_mode))
10327 enum rtx_code first_code = GET_CODE (varop);
10328 unsigned int first_count = INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1));
10329 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
10330 rtx mask_rtx;
10332 /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if
10333 the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if
10334 we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2)
10335 with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2),
10336 we can convert it to
10337 (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0) C3) C2) C1).
10338 This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */
10339 if (code == ASHIFT && first_code == ASHIFTRT
10340 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode)
10341 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))))
10343 /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */
10345 mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10346 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << first_count) - 1);
10348 varop = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode,
10349 XEXP (varop, 0), mask);
10350 varop = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, result_mode,
10351 varop, count);
10352 count = first_count;
10353 code = ASHIFTRT;
10354 continue;
10357 /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more
10358 than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert
10359 this to either an ASHIFT or an ASHIFTRT depending on the
10360 two counts.
10362 We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_MODE. */
10364 if (code == ASHIFTRT && first_code == ASHIFT
10365 && GET_MODE (varop) == shift_mode
10366 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop, 0), shift_mode)
10367 > first_count))
10369 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10370 count -= first_count;
10371 if (count < 0)
10373 count = -count;
10374 code = ASHIFT;
10377 continue;
10380 /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT,
10381 we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT.
10383 We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is
10384 ASHIFTRT.
10386 If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift,
10387 we can't do this if either shift is a right shift or ROTATE.
10389 Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide
10390 unless the codes are the same.
10392 Handle the case where the shift codes are the same
10393 first. */
10395 if (code == first_code)
10397 if (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10398 && (code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT
10399 || code == ROTATE))
10400 break;
10402 count += first_count;
10403 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10404 continue;
10407 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10408 || (code == ROTATE && first_code == ASHIFTRT)
10409 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10410 || (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10411 && (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT
10412 || first_code == ROTATE
10413 || code == ROTATE)))
10414 break;
10416 /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the
10417 nonzero bits of the inner shift the same way the
10418 outer shift will. */
10420 mask_rtx = gen_int_mode (nonzero_bits (varop, GET_MODE (varop)),
10421 result_mode);
10423 mask_rtx
10424 = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, result_mode, mask_rtx,
10425 GEN_INT (count));
10427 /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */
10428 if (mask_rtx == 0
10429 || !CONST_INT_P (mask_rtx)
10430 || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, AND,
10431 INTVAL (mask_rtx),
10432 result_mode, &complement_p))
10433 break;
10435 /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the
10436 counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */
10437 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10438 == (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT))
10439 count += first_count;
10440 else
10441 count -= first_count;
10443 /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE,
10444 except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is
10445 FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should
10446 always be used */
10447 if (count > 0
10448 && ((first_code == ROTATE && code == ASHIFT)
10449 || (first_code == ASHIFTRT && code == LSHIFTRT)))
10450 code = first_code;
10451 else if (count < 0)
10452 code = first_code, count = -count;
10454 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10455 continue;
10458 /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to
10459 (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if
10460 B is not a constant. */
10462 else if (GET_CODE (varop) == code
10463 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 0))
10464 && !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1)))
10466 rtx new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, mode,
10467 XEXP (varop, 0),
10468 GEN_INT (count));
10469 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, mode, new_rtx, XEXP (varop, 1));
10470 count = 0;
10471 continue;
10473 break;
10475 case NOT:
10476 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
10477 break;
10479 /* Make this fit the case below. */
10480 varop = gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constm1_rtx);
10481 continue;
10483 case IOR:
10484 case AND:
10485 case XOR:
10486 /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C)
10487 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10488 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10489 we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift
10490 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with
10491 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */
10493 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == PLUS
10494 && XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
10495 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10496 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10497 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10498 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10500 count = 0;
10501 varop = gen_rtx_LE (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10502 const0_rtx);
10504 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10505 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10507 continue;
10510 /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside
10511 to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the
10512 shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to
10513 what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have
10514 (and (shift)) insns. */
10516 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10517 /* We can't do this if we have (ashiftrt (xor)) and the
10518 constant has its sign bit set in shift_mode with shift_mode
10519 wider than result_mode. */
10520 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10521 && result_mode != shift_mode
10522 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10523 shift_mode))
10524 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10525 (code, result_mode,
10526 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10527 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10528 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10529 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, GET_CODE (varop),
10530 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10532 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10533 continue;
10536 /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the
10537 logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply
10538 the inverse distributive law. This also can't be done for
10539 (ashiftrt (xor)) where we've widened the shift and the constant
10540 changes the sign bit. */
10541 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10542 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10543 && result_mode != shift_mode
10544 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10545 shift_mode)))
10547 rtx lhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10548 XEXP (varop, 0), count);
10549 rtx rhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10550 XEXP (varop, 1), count);
10552 varop = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), shift_mode,
10553 lhs, rhs);
10554 varop = apply_distributive_law (varop);
10556 count = 0;
10557 continue;
10559 break;
10561 case EQ:
10562 /* Convert (lshiftrt (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE
10563 says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is
10564 GET_MODE_PRECISION (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only its low-order bit
10565 that may be nonzero. */
10566 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10567 && XEXP (varop, 1) == const0_rtx
10568 && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == result_mode
10569 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10570 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10571 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
10572 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10573 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10574 &complement_p))
10576 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10577 count = 0;
10578 continue;
10580 break;
10582 case NEG:
10583 /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less
10584 than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */
10585 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10586 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10587 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1)
10589 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10590 count = 0;
10591 continue;
10594 /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the
10595 NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */
10596 if (code == ASHIFT
10597 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, NEG, 0, result_mode,
10598 &complement_p))
10600 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10601 continue;
10603 break;
10605 case PLUS:
10606 /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C
10607 is one less than the number of bits in the mode is
10608 equivalent to (xor A 1). */
10609 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10610 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10611 && XEXP (varop, 1) == constm1_rtx
10612 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10613 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10614 &complement_p))
10616 count = 0;
10617 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10618 continue;
10621 /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits
10622 that might be nonzero in BAR are those being shifted out and those
10623 bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO.
10624 Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when
10625 we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */
10627 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10628 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10629 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode) >> count == 0
10630 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode)
10631 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)) == 0)
10633 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10634 continue;
10636 else if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10637 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10638 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10639 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10640 >> count)
10641 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10642 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1),
10643 result_mode)))
10645 varop = XEXP (varop, 1);
10646 continue;
10649 /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */
10650 if (code == ASHIFT
10651 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10652 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10653 (ASHIFT, result_mode,
10654 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10655 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10656 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10657 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, PLUS,
10658 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10660 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10661 continue;
10664 /* Check for 'PLUS signbit', which is the canonical form of 'XOR
10665 signbit', and attempt to change the PLUS to an XOR and move it to
10666 the outer operation as is done above in the AND/IOR/XOR case
10667 leg for shift(logical). See details in logical handling above
10668 for reasoning in doing so. */
10669 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10670 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10671 && mode_signbit_p (result_mode, XEXP (varop, 1))
10672 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10673 (code, result_mode,
10674 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10675 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10676 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10677 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR,
10678 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10680 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10681 continue;
10684 break;
10686 case MINUS:
10687 /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C)
10688 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10689 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10690 we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with
10691 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1,
10692 we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */
10694 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10695 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
10696 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10697 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10698 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10699 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == count
10700 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10702 count = 0;
10703 varop = gen_rtx_GT (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10704 const0_rtx);
10706 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10707 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10709 continue;
10711 break;
10713 case TRUNCATE:
10714 /* Change (lshiftrt (truncate (lshiftrt))) to (truncate (lshiftrt))
10715 if the truncate does not affect the value. */
10716 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10717 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
10718 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10719 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10720 >= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)))
10721 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)))))
10723 rtx varop_inner = XEXP (varop, 0);
10725 varop_inner
10726 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (GET_MODE (varop_inner),
10727 XEXP (varop_inner, 0),
10728 GEN_INT
10729 (count + INTVAL (XEXP (varop_inner, 1))));
10730 varop = gen_rtx_TRUNCATE (GET_MODE (varop), varop_inner);
10731 count = 0;
10732 continue;
10734 break;
10736 default:
10737 break;
10740 break;
10743 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode, mode,
10744 outer_op, outer_const);
10746 /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be
10747 a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If
10748 OUTER_OP is non-UNKNOWN, it is an operation that needs to be applied
10749 to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant,
10750 but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. */
10752 if (outer_op == UNKNOWN
10753 && orig_code == code && orig_count == count
10754 && varop == orig_varop
10755 && shift_mode == GET_MODE (varop))
10756 return NULL_RTX;
10758 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
10759 varop = gen_lowpart (shift_mode, varop);
10760 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
10761 return NULL_RTX;
10763 /* If we have an outer operation and we just made a shift, it is
10764 possible that we could have simplified the shift were it not
10765 for the outer operation. So try to do the simplification
10766 recursively. */
10768 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
10769 x = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, shift_mode, varop, count);
10770 else
10771 x = NULL_RTX;
10773 if (x == NULL_RTX)
10774 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, shift_mode, varop, GEN_INT (count));
10776 /* If we were doing an LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally,
10777 turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */
10778 if (orig_code == LSHIFTRT && result_mode != shift_mode)
10779 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, shift_mode, x,
10780 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode) >> orig_count);
10782 /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */
10783 x = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (result_mode, x);
10785 /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer
10786 operation. */
10787 if (complement_p)
10788 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, result_mode, x, result_mode);
10790 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
10792 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) != RTX_UNARY
10793 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
10794 outer_const = trunc_int_for_mode (outer_const, result_mode);
10796 if (outer_op == AND)
10797 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode, x, outer_const);
10798 else if (outer_op == SET)
10800 /* This means that we have determined that the result is
10801 equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */
10802 if (!side_effects_p (x))
10803 x = GEN_INT (outer_const);
10805 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) == RTX_UNARY)
10806 x = simplify_gen_unary (outer_op, result_mode, x, result_mode);
10807 else
10808 x = simplify_gen_binary (outer_op, result_mode, x,
10809 GEN_INT (outer_const));
10812 return x;
10815 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift.
10816 The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. If we cannot simplify it,
10817 return X or, if it is NULL, synthesize the expression with
10818 simplify_gen_binary. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10820 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10821 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10822 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10824 static rtx
10825 simplify_shift_const (rtx x, enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
10826 rtx varop, int count)
10828 rtx tem = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, result_mode, varop, count);
10829 if (tem)
10830 return tem;
10832 if (!x)
10833 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (varop), varop, GEN_INT (count));
10834 if (GET_MODE (x) != result_mode)
10835 x = gen_lowpart (result_mode, x);
10836 return x;
10840 /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern.
10841 We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to.
10842 If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern,
10843 storing the replacement into the same pointer object.
10845 Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs.
10847 PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for
10848 the CLOBBERs are placed.
10850 The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched,
10851 or -1. */
10853 static int
10854 recog_for_combine (rtx *pnewpat, rtx_insn *insn, rtx *pnotes)
10856 rtx pat = *pnewpat;
10857 rtx pat_without_clobbers;
10858 int insn_code_number;
10859 int num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
10860 int i;
10861 rtx notes = NULL_RTX;
10862 rtx old_notes, old_pat;
10863 int old_icode;
10865 /* If PAT is a PARALLEL, check to see if it contains the CLOBBER
10866 we use to indicate that something didn't match. If we find such a
10867 thing, force rejection. */
10868 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10869 for (i = XVECLEN (pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
10870 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER
10871 && XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0) == const0_rtx)
10872 return -1;
10874 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
10875 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
10876 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
10877 REG_NOTES (insn) = NULL_RTX;
10879 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
10880 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
10882 if (insn_code_number < 0)
10883 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10884 else
10885 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10886 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
10889 /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn
10890 that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined
10891 insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers
10892 unless this represents an ASM insn. */
10894 if (insn_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)
10895 && GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10897 int pos;
10899 for (pos = 0, i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
10900 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER)
10902 if (i != pos)
10903 SUBST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, pos), XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
10904 pos++;
10907 SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat, 0), pos);
10909 if (pos == 1)
10910 pat = XVECEXP (pat, 0, 0);
10912 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
10913 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
10914 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
10916 if (insn_code_number < 0)
10917 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10918 else
10919 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10920 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
10924 pat_without_clobbers = pat;
10926 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
10927 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
10929 /* Recognize all noop sets, these will be killed by followup pass. */
10930 if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (pat) == SET && set_noop_p (pat))
10931 insn_code_number = NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE, num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
10933 /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains
10934 them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */
10935 if (num_clobbers_to_add)
10937 rtx newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
10938 rtvec_alloc (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL
10939 ? (XVECLEN (pat, 0)
10940 + num_clobbers_to_add)
10941 : num_clobbers_to_add + 1));
10943 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10944 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
10945 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i) = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
10946 else
10947 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = pat;
10949 add_clobbers (newpat, insn_code_number);
10951 for (i = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add;
10952 i < XVECLEN (newpat, 0); i++)
10954 if (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0))
10955 && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), insn))
10956 return -1;
10957 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)) != SCRATCH)
10959 gcc_assert (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)));
10960 notes = alloc_reg_note (REG_UNUSED,
10961 XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), notes);
10964 pat = newpat;
10967 if (insn_code_number >= 0
10968 && insn_code_number != NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE)
10970 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
10971 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
10972 old_icode = INSN_CODE (insn);
10973 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
10974 REG_NOTES (insn) = notes;
10976 /* Allow targets to reject combined insn. */
10977 if (!targetm.legitimate_combined_insn (insn))
10979 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
10980 fputs ("Instruction not appropriate for target.",
10981 dump_file);
10983 /* Callers expect recog_for_combine to strip
10984 clobbers from the pattern on failure. */
10985 pat = pat_without_clobbers;
10986 notes = NULL_RTX;
10988 insn_code_number = -1;
10991 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
10992 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
10993 INSN_CODE (insn) = old_icode;
10996 *pnewpat = pat;
10997 *pnotes = notes;
10999 return insn_code_number;
11002 /* Like gen_lowpart_general but for use by combine. In combine it
11003 is not possible to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is
11004 safe to create invalid memory addresses, because combine will
11005 try to recognize them and all they will do is make the combine
11006 attempt fail.
11008 If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx
11009 (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned.
11010 An insn containing that will not be recognized. */
11012 static rtx
11013 gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode omode, rtx x)
11015 machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (x);
11016 unsigned int osize = GET_MODE_SIZE (omode);
11017 unsigned int isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11018 rtx result;
11020 if (omode == imode)
11021 return x;
11023 /* We can only support MODE being wider than a word if X is a
11024 constant integer or has a mode the same size. */
11025 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (omode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
11026 && ! (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (x) || isize == osize))
11027 goto fail;
11029 /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart
11030 won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and
11031 process normally. */
11032 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
11034 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
11036 /* For use in case we fall down into the address adjustments
11037 further below, we need to adjust the known mode and size of
11038 x; imode and isize, since we just adjusted x. */
11039 imode = GET_MODE (x);
11041 if (imode == omode)
11042 return x;
11044 isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11047 result = gen_lowpart_common (omode, x);
11049 if (result)
11050 return result;
11052 if (MEM_P (x))
11054 int offset = 0;
11056 /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent
11057 address. */
11058 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
11059 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
11060 goto fail;
11062 /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref,
11063 generate a paradoxical subreg instead. That will force a reload
11064 of the original memref X. */
11065 if (isize < osize)
11066 return gen_rtx_SUBREG (omode, x, 0);
11068 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11069 offset = MAX (isize, UNITS_PER_WORD) - MAX (osize, UNITS_PER_WORD);
11071 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data is
11072 unchanged. */
11073 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
11074 offset -= MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, osize) - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, isize);
11076 return adjust_address_nv (x, omode, offset);
11079 /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This
11080 probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */
11081 else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
11082 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (x), omode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
11084 /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a
11085 SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may
11086 include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */
11087 else
11089 int offset = 0;
11090 rtx res;
11092 offset = subreg_lowpart_offset (omode, imode);
11093 if (imode == VOIDmode)
11095 imode = int_mode_for_mode (omode);
11096 x = gen_lowpart_common (imode, x);
11097 if (x == NULL)
11098 goto fail;
11100 res = simplify_gen_subreg (omode, x, imode, offset);
11101 if (res)
11102 return res;
11105 fail:
11106 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (omode, const0_rtx);
11109 /* Try to simplify a comparison between OP0 and a constant OP1,
11110 where CODE is the comparison code that will be tested, into a
11111 (CODE OP0 const0_rtx) form.
11113 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use.
11114 *POP1 may be updated. */
11116 static enum rtx_code
11117 simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode,
11118 rtx op0, rtx *pop1)
11120 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11121 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op = INTVAL (*pop1);
11123 /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits
11124 not on in our mode. */
11125 if (mode != VOIDmode)
11126 const_op = trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode);
11128 /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value
11129 being compared can only have that single bit nonzero (e.g., it was
11130 `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison
11131 with zero. */
11132 if (const_op
11133 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == GEU
11134 || code == LT || code == LTU)
11135 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11136 && exact_log2 (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) >= 0
11137 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11138 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))))
11140 code = (code == EQ || code == GE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11141 const_op = 0;
11144 /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or
11145 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */
11146 if (const_op == -1
11147 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GT || code == LE
11148 || code == GEU || code == LTU)
11149 && num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) == mode_width)
11151 code = (code == EQ || code == LE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11152 const_op = 0;
11155 /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer
11156 comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons.
11157 If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */
11158 switch (code)
11160 case LT:
11161 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */
11162 if (const_op > 0)
11164 const_op -= 1;
11165 code = LE;
11166 /* ... fall through to LE case below. */
11168 else
11169 break;
11171 case LE:
11172 /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */
11173 if (const_op < 0)
11175 const_op += 1;
11176 code = LT;
11179 /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have
11180 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */
11181 else if (const_op == 0
11182 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11183 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11184 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11185 == 0)
11186 code = EQ;
11187 break;
11189 case GE:
11190 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11191 if (const_op > 0)
11193 const_op -= 1;
11194 code = GT;
11195 /* ... fall through to GT below. */
11197 else
11198 break;
11200 case GT:
11201 /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0. */
11202 if (const_op < 0)
11204 const_op += 1;
11205 code = GE;
11208 /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have
11209 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */
11210 else if (const_op == 0
11211 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11212 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11213 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11214 == 0)
11215 code = NE;
11216 break;
11218 case LTU:
11219 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */
11220 if (const_op > 0)
11222 const_op -= 1;
11223 code = LEU;
11224 /* ... fall through ... */
11226 /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */
11227 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11228 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11229 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))
11231 const_op = 0;
11232 code = GE;
11233 break;
11235 else
11236 break;
11238 case LEU:
11239 /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */
11240 if (const_op == 0)
11241 code = EQ;
11242 /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */
11243 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11244 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11245 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11247 const_op = 0;
11248 code = GE;
11250 break;
11252 case GEU:
11253 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11254 if (const_op > 1)
11256 const_op -= 1;
11257 code = GTU;
11258 /* ... fall through ... */
11261 /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */
11262 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11263 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11264 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))
11266 const_op = 0;
11267 code = LT;
11268 break;
11270 else
11271 break;
11273 case GTU:
11274 /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */
11275 if (const_op == 0)
11276 code = NE;
11277 /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */
11278 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11279 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11280 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11282 const_op = 0;
11283 code = LT;
11285 break;
11287 default:
11288 break;
11291 *pop1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
11292 return code;
11295 /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the
11296 comparison code that will be tested.
11298 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and
11299 *POP1 may be updated.
11301 It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always
11302 true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant
11303 folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies
11304 should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */
11306 static enum rtx_code
11307 simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code code, rtx *pop0, rtx *pop1)
11309 rtx op0 = *pop0;
11310 rtx op1 = *pop1;
11311 rtx tem, tem1;
11312 int i;
11313 machine_mode mode, tmode;
11315 /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */
11316 while (1)
11318 #ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
11319 /* The test below this one won't handle SIGN_EXTENDs on these machines,
11320 so check specially. */
11321 if (code != GTU && code != GEU && code != LTU && code != LEU
11322 && GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (op1) == ASHIFTRT
11323 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
11324 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == ASHIFT
11325 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11326 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11327 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)))
11328 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0))))
11329 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11330 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1)
11331 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
11332 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 1)
11333 && (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
11334 == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0))
11335 - (GET_MODE_PRECISION
11336 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))))))))
11338 op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
11339 op1 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0));
11341 #endif
11343 /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the
11344 shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of
11345 this shift are known to be zero for both inputs and if the type of
11346 comparison is compatible with the shift. */
11347 if (GET_CODE (op0) == GET_CODE (op1)
11348 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
11349 && ((GET_CODE (op0) == ROTATE && (code == NE || code == EQ))
11350 || ((GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11351 && (code != GT && code != LT && code != GE && code != LE))
11352 || (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT
11353 && (code != GTU && code != LTU
11354 && code != GEU && code != LEU)))
11355 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11356 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
11357 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11358 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1))
11360 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11361 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11362 int shift_count = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11364 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT)
11365 mask &= (mask >> shift_count) << shift_count;
11366 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11367 mask = (mask & (mask << shift_count)) >> shift_count;
11369 if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0
11370 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op1, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0)
11371 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11372 else
11373 break;
11376 /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the
11377 SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would
11378 be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode,
11379 do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1
11380 and the operand's possibly nonzero bits are 0xffffff01; in that case
11381 if we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case
11382 occurs if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and
11383 STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386).
11385 Similarly, check for a case where the AND's are ZERO_EXTEND
11386 operations from some narrower mode even though a SUBREG is not
11387 present. */
11389 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND && GET_CODE (op1) == AND
11390 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11391 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
11393 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11394 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11395 HOST_WIDE_INT c0 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11396 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1));
11397 int changed = 0;
11399 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner_op0)
11400 && GET_CODE (inner_op1) == SUBREG
11401 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0))
11402 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1)))
11403 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))
11404 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11405 && (0 == ((~c0) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0),
11406 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))))
11407 && (0 == ((~c1) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1),
11408 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1))))))
11410 op0 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op0);
11411 op1 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op1);
11413 /* The resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked
11414 off the original sign bit. */
11415 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11417 changed = 1;
11420 else if (c0 == c1)
11421 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE
11422 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)));
11423 tmode != GET_MODE (op0); tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
11424 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c0 == GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
11426 op0 = gen_lowpart (tmode, inner_op0);
11427 op1 = gen_lowpart (tmode, inner_op1);
11428 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11429 changed = 1;
11430 break;
11433 if (! changed)
11434 break;
11437 /* If both operands are NOT, we can strip off the outer operation
11438 and adjust the comparison code for swapped operands; similarly for
11439 NEG, except that this must be an equality comparison. */
11440 else if ((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && GET_CODE (op1) == NOT)
11441 || (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG && GET_CODE (op1) == NEG
11442 && (code == EQ || code == NE)))
11443 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0), code = swap_condition (code);
11445 else
11446 break;
11449 /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the
11450 comparison code appropriately, but don't do this if the second operand
11451 is already a constant integer. */
11452 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
11454 tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
11455 code = swap_condition (code);
11458 /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison.
11459 For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero,
11460 but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start
11461 out looking that way. */
11463 while (CONST_INT_P (op1))
11465 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11466 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11467 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11468 int equality_comparison_p;
11469 int sign_bit_comparison_p;
11470 int unsigned_comparison_p;
11471 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op;
11473 /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode,
11474 CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we
11475 can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison
11476 operation. */
11478 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
11479 && ! (mode == VOIDmode
11480 && (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (op0))))
11481 break;
11483 /* Try to simplify the compare to constant, possibly changing the
11484 comparison op, and/or changing op1 to zero. */
11485 code = simplify_compare_const (code, mode, op0, &op1);
11486 const_op = INTVAL (op1);
11488 /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */
11490 equality_comparison_p = (code == EQ || code == NE);
11491 sign_bit_comparison_p = ((code == LT || code == GE) && const_op == 0);
11492 unsigned_comparison_p = (code == LTU || code == LEU || code == GTU
11493 || code == GEU);
11495 /* If this is a sign bit comparison and we can do arithmetic in
11496 MODE, say that we will only be needing the sign bit of OP0. */
11497 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
11498 op0 = force_to_mode (op0, mode,
11499 (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
11500 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
11503 /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases
11504 does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the
11505 switch. */
11507 switch (GET_CODE (op0))
11509 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
11510 /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in
11511 a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it
11512 with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison
11513 between the position and the location of the single bit. */
11514 /* Except we can't if SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED is set, since we might
11515 have already reduced the shift count modulo the word size. */
11516 if (!SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
11517 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11518 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
11519 && equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
11520 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 0)))) >= 0)
11522 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11523 i = BITS_PER_WORD - 1 - i;
11525 op0 = XEXP (op0, 2);
11526 op1 = GEN_INT (i);
11527 const_op = i;
11529 /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */
11530 code = reverse_condition (code);
11531 continue;
11534 /* ... fall through ... */
11536 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
11537 tem = expand_compound_operation (op0);
11538 if (tem != op0)
11540 op0 = tem;
11541 continue;
11543 break;
11545 case NOT:
11546 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */
11547 if (equality_comparison_p
11548 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11550 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11551 op1 = tem;
11552 continue;
11555 /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the
11556 comparison. */
11557 if (sign_bit_comparison_p)
11559 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11560 code = (code == GE ? LT : GE);
11561 continue;
11563 break;
11565 case NEG:
11566 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */
11567 if (equality_comparison_p
11568 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11570 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11571 op1 = tem;
11572 continue;
11575 /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */
11576 if (const_op != 0)
11577 break;
11579 /* When X is ABS or is known positive,
11580 (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */
11582 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
11583 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS
11584 || (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11585 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
11586 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11587 == 0)))
11589 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11590 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
11591 continue;
11594 /* If we have NEG of something whose two high-order bits are the
11595 same, we know that "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". */
11596 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) >= 2)
11598 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11599 code = swap_condition (code);
11600 continue;
11602 break;
11604 case ROTATE:
11605 /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we
11606 can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */
11607 if (equality_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11608 && (tem = simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT, mode,
11609 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))) != 0)
11611 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11612 op1 = tem;
11613 continue;
11616 /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing
11617 a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that
11618 bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
11619 if (const_op == 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p
11620 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11621 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11623 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
11624 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
11625 << (mode_width - 1
11626 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
11627 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
11628 continue;
11631 /* Fall through. */
11633 case ABS:
11634 /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */
11635 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p)
11637 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11638 continue;
11640 break;
11642 case SIGN_EXTEND:
11643 /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) to
11644 (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we
11645 are either testing inequality or have an unsigned
11646 comparison with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with
11647 SIGN_EXTEND. But don't do it if we don't have a compare
11648 insn of the given mode, since we'd have to revert it
11649 later on, and then we wouldn't know whether to sign- or
11650 zero-extend. */
11651 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
11652 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
11653 && ! unsigned_comparison_p
11654 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
11655 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode) == const_op
11656 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
11658 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11659 continue;
11661 break;
11663 case SUBREG:
11664 /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, that is
11666 (subreg:MODE (plus (A) (-C1))) op (C2)
11668 with C1 a constant, and try to lift the SUBREG, i.e. to do the
11669 comparison in the wider mode. One of the following two conditions
11670 must be true in order for this to be valid:
11672 1. The mode extension results in the same bit pattern being added
11673 on both sides and the comparison is equality or unsigned. As
11674 C2 has been truncated to fit in MODE, the pattern can only be
11675 all 0s or all 1s.
11677 2. The mode extension results in the sign bit being copied on
11678 each side.
11680 The difficulty here is that we have predicates for A but not for
11681 (A - C1) so we need to check that C1 is within proper bounds so
11682 as to perturbate A as little as possible. */
11684 if (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11685 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
11686 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) > mode_width
11687 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)) == PLUS
11688 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)))
11690 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
11691 rtx a = XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 0);
11692 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = -INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1));
11694 if ((c1 > 0
11695 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
11696 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)
11697 && (equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
11698 /* (A - C1) zero-extends if it is positive and sign-extends
11699 if it is negative, C2 both zero- and sign-extends. */
11700 && ((0 == (nonzero_bits (a, inner_mode)
11701 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11702 && const_op >= 0)
11703 /* (A - C1) sign-extends if it is positive and 1-extends
11704 if it is negative, C2 both sign- and 1-extends. */
11705 || (num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
11706 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
11707 - mode_width)
11708 && const_op < 0)))
11709 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
11710 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 2)
11711 /* (A - C1) always sign-extends, like C2. */
11712 && num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
11713 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
11714 - (mode_width - 1))))
11716 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
11717 continue;
11721 /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part,
11722 we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */
11723 if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
11724 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) < mode_width)
11725 /* Fall through */ ;
11726 else
11727 break;
11729 /* ... fall through ... */
11731 case ZERO_EXTEND:
11732 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
11733 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
11734 && (unsigned_comparison_p || equality_comparison_p)
11735 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
11736 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
11737 && const_op >= 0
11738 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
11740 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11741 continue;
11743 break;
11745 case PLUS:
11746 /* (eq (plus X A) B) -> (eq X (minus B A)). We can only do
11747 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
11748 overflows. */
11749 if (equality_comparison_p
11750 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
11751 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))))
11753 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11754 op1 = tem;
11755 continue;
11758 /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */
11759 if (const_op == 0 && XEXP (op0, 1) == constm1_rtx
11760 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS && sign_bit_comparison_p)
11762 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
11763 code = (code == LT ? EQ : NE);
11764 continue;
11766 break;
11768 case MINUS:
11769 /* We used to optimize signed comparisons against zero, but that
11770 was incorrect. Unsigned comparisons against zero (GTU, LEU)
11771 arrive here as equality comparisons, or (GEU, LTU) are
11772 optimized away. No need to special-case them. */
11774 /* (eq (minus A B) C) -> (eq A (plus B C)) or
11775 (eq B (minus A C)), whichever simplifies. We can only do
11776 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
11777 overflows. */
11778 if (equality_comparison_p
11779 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
11780 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
11782 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11783 op1 = tem;
11784 continue;
11787 if (equality_comparison_p
11788 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
11789 XEXP (op0, 0), op1)))
11791 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11792 op1 = tem;
11793 continue;
11796 /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number
11797 of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */
11798 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
11799 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
11800 && UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == mode_width - 1
11801 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
11803 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11804 code = (code == GE ? LE : GT);
11805 continue;
11807 break;
11809 case XOR:
11810 /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification
11811 if C is zero or B is a constant. */
11812 if (equality_comparison_p
11813 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (XOR, mode,
11814 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
11816 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11817 op1 = tem;
11818 continue;
11820 break;
11822 case EQ: case NE:
11823 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
11824 case LT: case LTU: case UNLT: case LE: case LEU: case UNLE:
11825 case GT: case GTU: case UNGT: case GE: case GEU: case UNGE:
11826 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
11827 /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather
11828 than an actual data value. */
11829 if (const_op != 0
11830 || CC0_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11831 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) == MODE_CC)
11832 break;
11834 /* Get the two operands being compared. */
11835 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == COMPARE)
11836 tem = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), tem1 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
11837 else
11838 tem = XEXP (op0, 0), tem1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11840 /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the
11841 earlier test or the opposite of that result. */
11842 if (code == NE || code == EQ
11843 || (val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (op0), STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
11844 && (code == LT || code == GE)))
11846 enum rtx_code new_code;
11847 if (code == LT || code == NE)
11848 new_code = GET_CODE (op0);
11849 else
11850 new_code = reversed_comparison_code (op0, NULL);
11852 if (new_code != UNKNOWN)
11854 code = new_code;
11855 op0 = tem;
11856 op1 = tem1;
11857 continue;
11860 break;
11862 case IOR:
11863 /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is nonzero
11864 iff X <= 0. */
11865 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
11866 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
11867 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
11869 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11870 code = (code == GE ? GT : LE);
11871 continue;
11873 break;
11875 case AND:
11876 /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This
11877 will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */
11878 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
11879 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
11880 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0) == const1_rtx)
11882 op0 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (op0, 1),
11883 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1));
11884 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
11885 continue;
11888 /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with
11889 zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set
11890 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */
11891 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
11892 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11893 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11894 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
11895 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
11896 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) >= 0
11897 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11899 mask = ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11900 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)));
11901 if ((~STORE_FLAG_VALUE & mask) == 0
11902 && (COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))
11903 || ((tem = get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))) != 0
11904 && COMPARISON_P (tem))))
11906 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
11907 continue;
11911 /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal
11912 to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of
11913 the underlying value. */
11914 if (equality_comparison_p
11915 && const_op == 0
11916 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11917 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11918 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11919 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11921 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11922 code = (code == EQ ? GE : LT);
11923 continue;
11926 /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower
11927 mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an
11928 equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in
11929 the narrower mode.
11931 Note that in:
11933 (ne:DI (and:DI (reg:DI 4) (const_int 0xffffffff)) (const_int 0))
11934 -> (ne:DI (reg:SI 4) (const_int 0))
11936 unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION allows it or the register is
11937 known to hold a value of the required mode the
11938 transformation is invalid. */
11939 if ((equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
11940 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11941 && (i = exact_log2 ((UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
11942 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11943 + 1)) >= 0
11944 && const_op >> i == 0
11945 && (tmode = mode_for_size (i, MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
11946 && (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode, GET_MODE (op0))
11947 || (REG_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11948 && reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode, XEXP (op0, 0)))))
11950 op0 = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (op0, 0));
11951 continue;
11954 /* If this is (and:M1 (subreg:M2 X 0) (const_int C1)) where C1
11955 fits in both M1 and M2 and the SUBREG is either paradoxical
11956 or represents the low part, permute the SUBREG and the AND
11957 and try again. */
11958 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SUBREG)
11960 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c1;
11961 tmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)));
11962 /* Require an integral mode, to avoid creating something like
11963 (AND:SF ...). */
11964 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (tmode)
11965 /* It is unsafe to commute the AND into the SUBREG if the
11966 SUBREG is paradoxical and WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is
11967 not defined. As originally written the upper bits
11968 have a defined value due to the AND operation.
11969 However, if we commute the AND inside the SUBREG then
11970 they no longer have defined values and the meaning of
11971 the code has been changed. */
11972 && (0
11973 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
11974 || (mode_width > GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
11975 && mode_width <= BITS_PER_WORD)
11976 #endif
11977 || (mode_width <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
11978 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (op0, 0))))
11979 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11980 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11981 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
11982 && ((c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) & ~mask) == 0
11983 && (c1 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) == 0
11984 && c1 != mask
11985 && c1 != GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
11987 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
11988 SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)),
11989 gen_int_mode (c1, tmode));
11990 op0 = gen_lowpart (mode, op0);
11991 continue;
11995 /* Convert (ne (and (not X) 1) 0) to (eq (and X 1) 0). */
11996 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
11997 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
11998 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == NOT)
12000 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode,
12001 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1);
12002 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12003 continue;
12006 /* Convert (ne (and (lshiftrt (not X)) 1) 0) to
12007 (eq (and (lshiftrt X) 1) 0).
12008 Also handle the case where (not X) is expressed using xor. */
12009 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12010 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
12011 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT)
12013 rtx shift_op = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12014 rtx shift_count = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12016 if (GET_CODE (shift_op) == NOT
12017 || (GET_CODE (shift_op) == XOR
12018 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12019 && CONST_INT_P (shift_count)
12020 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
12021 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12022 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12023 << INTVAL (shift_count))))
12026 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (shift_op, 0), shift_count);
12027 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
12028 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12029 continue;
12032 break;
12034 case ASHIFT:
12035 /* If we have (compare (ashift FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12036 the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison)
12037 are known to be zero, we can do this by comparing FOO with C
12038 shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are
12039 zero. */
12040 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12041 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
12042 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p)
12043 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12044 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12045 & (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12046 - 1)) == 0)
12047 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12048 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12049 & ~(mask >> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
12050 + ! equality_comparison_p))) == 0)
12052 /* We must perform a logical shift, not an arithmetic one,
12053 as we want the top N bits of C to be zero. */
12054 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT temp = const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
12056 temp >>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12057 op1 = gen_int_mode (temp, mode);
12058 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12059 continue;
12062 /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing
12063 a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */
12064 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12065 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12067 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
12068 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12069 << (mode_width - 1
12070 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
12071 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
12072 continue;
12075 /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting
12076 the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the
12077 low-order bit. */
12078 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12079 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12080 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12082 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12083 continue;
12085 break;
12087 case ASHIFTRT:
12088 /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this
12089 as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */
12090 if (equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
12091 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12093 op0 = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode,
12094 XEXP (op0, 0),
12095 INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)));
12096 continue;
12099 /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison,
12100 do the comparison in a narrower mode. */
12101 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12102 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12103 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
12104 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
12105 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12106 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12107 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12108 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12109 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12111 op0 = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
12112 continue;
12115 /* Likewise if OP0 is a PLUS of a sign extension with a
12116 constant, which is usually represented with the PLUS
12117 between the shifts. */
12118 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12119 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12120 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
12121 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12122 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT
12123 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1)
12124 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12125 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12126 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12127 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12128 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12130 rtx inner = XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 0);
12131 rtx add_const = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12132 rtx new_const = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFTRT, GET_MODE (op0),
12133 add_const, XEXP (op0, 1));
12135 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, tmode,
12136 gen_lowpart (tmode, inner),
12137 new_const);
12138 continue;
12141 /* ... fall through ... */
12142 case LSHIFTRT:
12143 /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12144 the low order N bits of FOO are known to be zero, we can do this
12145 by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no
12146 overflow occurs. Even if the low order N bits of FOO aren't known
12147 to be zero, if the comparison is >= or < we can use the same
12148 optimization and for > or <= by setting all the low
12149 order N bits in the comparison constant. */
12150 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12151 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) > 0
12152 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12153 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12154 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12155 + (GET_CODE (op0) != LSHIFTRT
12156 ? ((GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >> 1)
12157 + 1)
12158 : 0))
12159 <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))))
12161 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits
12162 = (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12163 & (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12164 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1));
12165 if (low_bits == 0 || !equality_comparison_p)
12167 /* If the shift was logical, then we must make the condition
12168 unsigned. */
12169 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT)
12170 code = unsigned_condition (code);
12172 const_op <<= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12173 if (low_bits != 0
12174 && (code == GT || code == GTU
12175 || code == LE || code == LEU))
12176 const_op
12177 |= (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1);
12178 op1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
12179 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12180 continue;
12184 /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we
12185 can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */
12186 if (const_op == 0
12187 && (equality_comparison_p || sign_bit_comparison_p)
12188 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12189 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12191 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12192 code = (code == NE || code == GT ? LT : GE);
12193 continue;
12195 break;
12197 default:
12198 break;
12201 break;
12204 /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then,
12205 check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that is not doing anything or is
12206 paradoxical. The latter transformation must only be performed when
12207 it is known that the "extra" bits will be the same in op0 and op1 or
12208 that they don't matter. There are three cases to consider:
12210 1. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a register. In this case the bits are don't
12211 care bits and we can assume they have any convenient value. So
12212 making the transformation is safe.
12214 2. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is not defined.
12215 In this case the upper bits of op0 are undefined. We should not make
12216 the simplification in that case as we do not know the contents of
12217 those bits.
12219 3. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is defined and not
12220 UNKNOWN. In that case we know those bits are zeros or ones. We must
12221 also be sure that they are the same as the upper bits of op1.
12223 We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because
12224 the sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */
12226 op0 = make_compound_operation (op0, op1 == const0_rtx ? COMPARE : SET);
12227 op1 = make_compound_operation (op1, SET);
12229 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12230 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
12231 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == MODE_INT
12232 && (code == NE || code == EQ))
12234 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
12236 /* For paradoxical subregs, allow case 1 as above. Case 3 isn't
12237 implemented. */
12238 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12240 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
12241 op1 = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (op0), op1);
12244 else if ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12245 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12246 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0),
12247 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12248 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12250 tem = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)), op1);
12252 if ((nonzero_bits (tem, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12253 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12254 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0), op1 = tem;
12258 /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare
12259 insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a
12260 word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger
12261 mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in
12262 which we can use the wider mode. */
12264 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
12265 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12266 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
12267 && ! have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
12268 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
12269 (tmode != VOIDmode && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode));
12270 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
12271 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE, tmode))
12273 int zero_extended;
12275 /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit
12276 test of the sign bit. Test this first so we can use
12277 a paradoxical subreg to extend OP0. */
12279 if (op1 == const0_rtx && (code == LT || code == GE)
12280 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
12282 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sign
12283 = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
12284 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12285 gen_lowpart (tmode, op0),
12286 gen_int_mode (sign, tmode));
12287 code = (code == LT) ? NE : EQ;
12288 break;
12291 /* If the only nonzero bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the
12292 narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison,
12293 we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended
12294 values, in which case it is true for all comparisons. */
12295 zero_extended = ((code == EQ || code == NE
12296 || code == GEU || code == GTU
12297 || code == LEU || code == LTU)
12298 && (nonzero_bits (op0, tmode)
12299 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
12300 && ((CONST_INT_P (op1)
12301 || (nonzero_bits (op1, tmode)
12302 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)));
12304 if (zero_extended
12305 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (op0, tmode)
12306 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12307 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
12308 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1, tmode)
12309 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12310 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))))
12312 /* If OP0 is an AND and we don't have an AND in MODE either,
12313 make a new AND in the proper mode. */
12314 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND
12315 && !have_insn_for (AND, mode))
12316 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12317 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12318 XEXP (op0, 0)),
12319 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12320 XEXP (op0, 1)));
12321 else
12323 if (zero_extended)
12325 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12326 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12328 else
12330 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12331 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12333 break;
12338 /* We may have changed the comparison operands. Re-canonicalize. */
12339 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
12341 tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
12342 code = swap_condition (code);
12345 /* If this machine only supports a subset of valid comparisons, see if we
12346 can convert an unsupported one into a supported one. */
12347 target_canonicalize_comparison (&code, &op0, &op1, 0);
12349 *pop0 = op0;
12350 *pop1 = op1;
12352 return code;
12355 /* Utility function for record_value_for_reg. Count number of
12356 rtxs in X. */
12357 static int
12358 count_rtxs (rtx x)
12360 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12361 const char *fmt;
12362 int i, j, ret = 1;
12364 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12365 || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12367 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12368 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12370 if (x0 == x1)
12371 return 1 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0);
12373 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12374 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12375 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12376 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0)
12377 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x1, 0)
12378 ? XEXP (x1, 1) : XEXP (x1, 0));
12380 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12381 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12382 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12383 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x1)
12384 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x0, 0)
12385 ? XEXP (x0, 1) : XEXP (x0, 0));
12388 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12389 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12390 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12391 ret += count_rtxs (XEXP (x, i));
12392 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12393 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12394 ret += count_rtxs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12396 return ret;
12399 /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value
12400 being stored into last_set_value. Sets last_set_table_tick
12401 for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.c */
12403 static void
12404 update_table_tick (rtx x)
12406 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12407 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12408 int i, j;
12410 if (code == REG)
12412 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
12413 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
12414 unsigned int r;
12416 for (r = regno; r < endregno; r++)
12418 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[r];
12419 rsp->last_set_table_tick = label_tick;
12422 return;
12425 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12426 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12428 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
12429 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
12430 them. */
12431 if (i == 0 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
12433 /* Note that at this point x1 has already been
12434 processed. */
12435 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12436 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12438 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then there is no need to
12439 process x0. */
12440 if (x0 == x1)
12441 break;
12443 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then while
12444 processing x1, x0 has already been processed. Thus we
12445 are done with x. */
12446 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
12447 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12448 break;
12450 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then we
12451 still have to process the rest of x0. */
12452 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
12453 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12455 update_table_tick (XEXP (x0, x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) ? 1 : 0));
12456 break;
12460 update_table_tick (XEXP (x, i));
12462 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12463 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12464 update_table_tick (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12467 /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we
12468 are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its
12469 value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_stat[].last_set; this is
12470 only permitted with VALUE also zero and is used to invalidate the
12471 register. */
12473 static void
12474 record_value_for_reg (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn, rtx value)
12476 unsigned int regno = REGNO (reg);
12477 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
12478 unsigned int i;
12479 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12481 /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute
12482 the previous value. */
12483 if (value && insn && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, value))
12485 rtx tem;
12487 /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to
12488 our insn. */
12489 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12490 tem = get_last_value (reg);
12492 /* If TEM is simply a binary operation with two CLOBBERs as operands,
12493 it isn't going to be useful and will take a lot of time to process,
12494 so just use the CLOBBER. */
12496 if (tem)
12498 if (ARITHMETIC_P (tem)
12499 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER
12500 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 1)) == CLOBBER)
12501 tem = XEXP (tem, 0);
12502 else if (count_occurrences (value, reg, 1) >= 2)
12504 /* If there are two or more occurrences of REG in VALUE,
12505 prevent the value from growing too much. */
12506 if (count_rtxs (tem) > MAX_LAST_VALUE_RTL)
12507 tem = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (tem), const0_rtx);
12510 value = replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value), reg, tem);
12514 /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that
12515 we don't know about its bitwise content, that its value has been
12516 updated, and that we don't know the location of the death of the
12517 register. */
12518 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12520 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12522 if (insn)
12523 rsp->last_set = insn;
12525 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
12526 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
12527 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
12528 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
12529 rsp->last_death = 0;
12530 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
12533 /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */
12534 if (value)
12535 update_table_tick (value);
12537 /* Now update the status of each register being set.
12538 If someone is using this register in this block, set this register
12539 to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this
12540 basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we
12541 scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this
12542 is too much work for us. */
12544 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12546 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12547 rsp->last_set_label = label_tick;
12548 if (!insn
12549 || (value && rsp->last_set_table_tick >= label_tick_ebb_start))
12550 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
12551 else
12552 rsp->last_set_invalid = 0;
12555 /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that
12556 case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent
12557 infinite loops. */
12558 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
12559 if (value && !get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 0))
12561 value = copy_rtx (value);
12562 if (!get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 1))
12563 value = 0;
12566 /* For the main register being modified, update the value, the mode, the
12567 nonzero bits, and the number of sign bit copies. */
12569 rsp->last_set_value = value;
12571 if (value)
12573 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (reg);
12574 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12575 rsp->last_set_mode = mode;
12576 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12577 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
12578 mode = nonzero_bits_mode;
12579 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = nonzero_bits (value, mode);
12580 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies
12581 = num_sign_bit_copies (value, GET_MODE (reg));
12585 /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one
12586 SET or CLOBBER in an insn. DATA is the instruction in which the
12587 set is occurring. */
12589 static void
12590 record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx setter, void *data)
12592 rtx_insn *record_dead_insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
12594 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
12595 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
12597 if (!record_dead_insn)
12599 if (REG_P (dest))
12600 record_value_for_reg (dest, NULL, NULL_RTX);
12601 return;
12604 if (REG_P (dest))
12606 /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. Otherwise
12607 show that we don't know the value. We can handle SUBREG in
12608 some cases. */
12609 if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET && dest == SET_DEST (setter))
12610 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, SET_SRC (setter));
12611 else if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET
12612 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter)) == SUBREG
12613 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter)) == dest
12614 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) <= BITS_PER_WORD
12615 && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter)))
12616 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn,
12617 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest),
12618 SET_SRC (setter)));
12619 else
12620 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, NULL_RTX);
12622 else if (MEM_P (dest)
12623 /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */
12624 && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
12625 mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (record_dead_insn);
12628 /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed
12629 for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing
12630 INSN in the combiner loop.
12632 We update reg_stat[], in particular fields last_set, last_set_value,
12633 last_set_mode, last_set_nonzero_bits, last_set_sign_bit_copies,
12634 last_death, and also the similar information mem_last_set (which insn
12635 most recently modified memory) and last_call_luid (which insn was the
12636 most recent subroutine call). */
12638 static void
12639 record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *insn)
12641 rtx link;
12642 unsigned int i;
12644 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
12646 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_DEAD
12647 && REG_P (XEXP (link, 0)))
12649 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
12650 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
12652 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12654 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12656 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12657 rsp->last_death = insn;
12660 else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC)
12661 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link, 0), insn, NULL_RTX);
12664 if (CALL_P (insn))
12666 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
12667 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call, 0, i, hrsi)
12669 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12671 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12672 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
12673 rsp->last_set = insn;
12674 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
12675 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
12676 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
12677 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
12678 rsp->last_death = 0;
12679 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
12682 last_call_luid = mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12684 /* We can't combine into a call pattern. Remember, though, that
12685 the return value register is set at this LUID. We could
12686 still replace a register with the return value from the
12687 wrong subroutine call! */
12688 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, NULL_RTX);
12690 else
12691 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, insn);
12694 /* If a SUBREG has the promoted bit set, it is in fact a property of the
12695 register present in the SUBREG, so for each such SUBREG go back and
12696 adjust nonzero and sign bit information of the registers that are
12697 known to have some zero/sign bits set.
12699 This is needed because when combine blows the SUBREGs away, the
12700 information on zero/sign bits is lost and further combines can be
12701 missed because of that. */
12703 static void
12704 record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *insn, rtx subreg)
12706 struct insn_link *links;
12707 rtx set;
12708 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (subreg));
12709 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (subreg);
12711 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12712 return;
12714 for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links;)
12716 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12718 insn = links->insn;
12719 set = single_set (insn);
12721 if (! set || !REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
12722 || REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) != regno
12723 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subreg)))
12725 links = links->next;
12726 continue;
12729 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
12730 if (rsp->last_set == insn)
12732 if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (subreg))
12733 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
12736 if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set)))
12738 regno = REGNO (SET_SRC (set));
12739 links = LOG_LINKS (insn);
12741 else
12742 break;
12746 /* Check if X, a register, is known to contain a value already
12747 truncated to MODE. In this case we can use a subreg to refer to
12748 the truncated value even though in the generic case we would need
12749 an explicit truncation. */
12751 static bool
12752 reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode mode, const_rtx x)
12754 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
12755 machine_mode truncated = rsp->truncated_to_mode;
12757 if (truncated == 0
12758 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start)
12759 return false;
12760 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
12761 return true;
12762 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, truncated))
12763 return true;
12764 return false;
12767 /* If X is a hard reg or a subreg record the mode that the register is
12768 accessed in. For non-TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION targets we might be able
12769 to turn a truncate into a subreg using this information. Return true
12770 if traversing X is complete. */
12772 static bool
12773 record_truncated_value (rtx x)
12775 machine_mode truncated_mode;
12776 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12778 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
12780 machine_mode original_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
12781 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
12783 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (original_mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode))
12784 return true;
12786 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (truncated_mode, original_mode))
12787 return true;
12789 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
12791 /* ??? For hard-regs we now record everything. We might be able to
12792 optimize this using last_set_mode. */
12793 else if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
12794 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
12795 else
12796 return false;
12798 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
12799 if (rsp->truncated_to_mode == 0
12800 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start
12801 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode)
12802 < GET_MODE_SIZE (rsp->truncated_to_mode)))
12804 rsp->truncated_to_mode = truncated_mode;
12805 rsp->truncation_label = label_tick;
12808 return true;
12811 /* Callback for note_uses. Find hardregs and subregs of pseudos and
12812 the modes they are used in. This can help truning TRUNCATEs into
12813 SUBREGs. */
12815 static void
12816 record_truncated_values (rtx *loc, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
12818 subrtx_var_iterator::array_type array;
12819 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_VAR (iter, array, *loc, NONCONST)
12820 if (record_truncated_value (*iter))
12821 iter.skip_subrtxes ();
12824 /* Scan X for promoted SUBREGs. For each one found,
12825 note what it implies to the registers used in it. */
12827 static void
12828 check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *insn, rtx x)
12830 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
12831 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
12832 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
12833 record_promoted_value (insn, x);
12834 else
12836 const char *format = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
12837 int i, j;
12839 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)); i++)
12840 switch (format[i])
12842 case 'e':
12843 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XEXP (x, i));
12844 break;
12845 case 'V':
12846 case 'E':
12847 if (XVEC (x, i) != 0)
12848 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12849 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12850 break;
12855 /* Verify that all the registers and memory references mentioned in *LOC are
12856 still valid. *LOC was part of a value set in INSN when label_tick was
12857 equal to TICK. Return 0 if some are not. If REPLACE is nonzero, replace
12858 the invalid references with (clobber (const_int 0)) and return 1. This
12859 replacement is useful because we often can get useful information about
12860 the form of a value (e.g., if it was produced by a shift that always
12861 produces -1 or 0) even though we don't know exactly what registers it
12862 was produced from. */
12864 static int
12865 get_last_value_validate (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, int tick, int replace)
12867 rtx x = *loc;
12868 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
12869 int len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x));
12870 int i, j;
12872 if (REG_P (x))
12874 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
12875 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
12876 unsigned int j;
12878 for (j = regno; j < endregno; j++)
12880 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[j];
12881 if (rsp->last_set_invalid
12882 /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once and not
12883 live at the beginning of the function, it is always valid. */
12884 || (! (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
12885 && regno < reg_n_sets_max
12886 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
12887 && (!REGNO_REG_SET_P
12888 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
12889 regno)))
12890 && rsp->last_set_label > tick))
12892 if (replace)
12893 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
12894 return replace;
12898 return 1;
12900 /* If this is a memory reference, make sure that there were no stores after
12901 it that might have clobbered the value. We don't have alias info, so we
12902 assume any store invalidates it. Moreover, we only have local UIDs, so
12903 we also assume that there were stores in the intervening basic blocks. */
12904 else if (MEM_P (x) && !MEM_READONLY_P (x)
12905 && (tick != label_tick || DF_INSN_LUID (insn) <= mem_last_set))
12907 if (replace)
12908 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
12909 return replace;
12912 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
12914 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12916 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
12917 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
12918 them. */
12919 if (i == 1 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
12921 /* Note that at this point x0 has already been checked
12922 and found valid. */
12923 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12924 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12926 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then x is also valid. */
12927 if (x0 == x1)
12928 return 1;
12930 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then
12931 while checking x0, x1 has already been checked. Thus
12932 it is valid and so as x. */
12933 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
12934 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12935 return 1;
12937 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then x is
12938 valid iff the rest of x1 is valid. */
12939 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
12940 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12941 return
12942 get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x1,
12943 x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) ? 1 : 0),
12944 insn, tick, replace);
12947 if (get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x, i), insn, tick,
12948 replace) == 0)
12949 return 0;
12951 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12952 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12953 if (get_last_value_validate (&XVECEXP (x, i, j),
12954 insn, tick, replace) == 0)
12955 return 0;
12958 /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */
12959 return 1;
12962 /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers
12963 in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value
12964 is known longer known reliably. */
12966 static rtx
12967 get_last_value (const_rtx x)
12969 unsigned int regno;
12970 rtx value;
12971 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12973 /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and
12974 then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG,
12975 we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */
12976 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
12977 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
12978 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
12979 && (value = get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
12980 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), value);
12982 if (!REG_P (x))
12983 return 0;
12985 regno = REGNO (x);
12986 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
12987 value = rsp->last_set_value;
12989 /* If we don't have a value, or if it isn't for this basic block and
12990 it's either a hard register, set more than once, or it's a live
12991 at the beginning of the function, return 0.
12993 Because if it's not live at the beginning of the function then the reg
12994 is always set before being used (is never used without being set).
12995 And, if it's set only once, and it's always set before use, then all
12996 uses must have the same last value, even if it's not from this basic
12997 block. */
12999 if (value == 0
13000 || (rsp->last_set_label < label_tick_ebb_start
13001 && (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13002 || regno >= reg_n_sets_max
13003 || REG_N_SETS (regno) != 1
13004 || REGNO_REG_SET_P
13005 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), regno))))
13006 return 0;
13008 /* If the value was set in a later insn than the ones we are processing,
13009 we can't use it even if the register was only set once. */
13010 if (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13011 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) >= subst_low_luid)
13012 return 0;
13014 /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */
13015 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 0))
13016 return value;
13018 /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with
13019 (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */
13021 value = copy_rtx (value);
13022 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 1))
13023 return value;
13025 return 0;
13028 /* Return nonzero if expression X refers to a REG or to memory
13029 that is set in an instruction more recent than FROM_LUID. */
13031 static int
13032 use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx x, int from_luid)
13034 const char *fmt;
13035 int i;
13036 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13038 if (code == REG)
13040 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13041 unsigned endreg = END_REGNO (x);
13043 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
13044 /* Don't allow uses of the stack pointer to be moved,
13045 because we don't know whether the move crosses a push insn. */
13046 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && PUSH_ARGS)
13047 return 1;
13048 #endif
13049 for (; regno < endreg; regno++)
13051 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13052 if (rsp->last_set
13053 && rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13054 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) > from_luid)
13055 return 1;
13057 return 0;
13060 if (code == MEM && mem_last_set > from_luid)
13061 return 1;
13063 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13065 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13067 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13069 int j;
13070 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13071 if (use_crosses_set_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from_luid))
13072 return 1;
13074 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
13075 && use_crosses_set_p (XEXP (x, i), from_luid))
13076 return 1;
13078 return 0;
13081 /* Define three variables used for communication between the following
13082 routines. */
13084 static unsigned int reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno;
13085 static int reg_dead_flag;
13087 /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p.
13089 If DEST is within [reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno), set
13090 reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */
13092 static void
13093 reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx x, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
13095 unsigned int regno, endregno;
13097 if (!REG_P (dest))
13098 return;
13100 regno = REGNO (dest);
13101 endregno = END_REGNO (dest);
13102 if (reg_dead_endregno > regno && reg_dead_regno < endregno)
13103 reg_dead_flag = (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER) ? 1 : -1;
13106 /* Return nonzero if REG is known to be dead at INSN.
13108 We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER
13109 referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is
13110 live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic
13111 block we are in. Hard regs marked as being live in NEWPAT_USED_REGS
13112 must be assumed to be always live. */
13114 static int
13115 reg_dead_at_p (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn)
13117 basic_block block;
13118 unsigned int i;
13120 /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */
13121 reg_dead_regno = REGNO (reg);
13122 reg_dead_endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
13124 reg_dead_flag = 0;
13126 /* Check that reg isn't mentioned in NEWPAT_USED_REGS. For fixed registers
13127 we allow the machine description to decide whether use-and-clobber
13128 patterns are OK. */
13129 if (reg_dead_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13131 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13132 if (!fixed_regs[i] && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (newpat_used_regs, i))
13133 return 0;
13136 /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, or
13137 beginning of basic block. */
13138 block = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
13139 for (;;)
13141 if (INSN_P (insn))
13143 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, reg_dead_regno))
13144 return 1;
13146 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), reg_dead_at_p_1, NULL);
13147 if (reg_dead_flag)
13148 return reg_dead_flag == 1 ? 1 : 0;
13150 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, reg_dead_regno))
13151 return 1;
13154 if (insn == BB_HEAD (block))
13155 break;
13157 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
13160 /* Look at live-in sets for the basic block that we were in. */
13161 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13162 if (REGNO_REG_SET_P (df_get_live_in (block), i))
13163 return 0;
13165 return 1;
13168 /* Note hard registers in X that are used. */
13170 static void
13171 mark_used_regs_combine (rtx x)
13173 RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
13174 unsigned int regno;
13175 int i;
13177 switch (code)
13179 case LABEL_REF:
13180 case SYMBOL_REF:
13181 case CONST:
13182 CASE_CONST_ANY:
13183 case PC:
13184 case ADDR_VEC:
13185 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
13186 case ASM_INPUT:
13187 /* CC0 must die in the insn after it is set, so we don't need to take
13188 special note of it here. */
13189 case CC0:
13190 return;
13192 case CLOBBER:
13193 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any hard registers inside the
13194 address as used. */
13195 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
13196 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
13197 return;
13199 case REG:
13200 regno = REGNO (x);
13201 /* A hard reg in a wide mode may really be multiple registers.
13202 If so, mark all of them just like the first. */
13203 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13205 /* None of this applies to the stack, frame or arg pointers. */
13206 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
13207 #if !HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
13208 || regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
13209 #endif
13210 #if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
13211 || (regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno])
13212 #endif
13213 || regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
13214 return;
13216 add_to_hard_reg_set (&newpat_used_regs, GET_MODE (x), regno);
13218 return;
13220 case SET:
13222 /* If setting a MEM, or a SUBREG of a MEM, then note any hard regs in
13223 the address. */
13224 rtx testreg = SET_DEST (x);
13226 while (GET_CODE (testreg) == SUBREG
13227 || GET_CODE (testreg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13228 || GET_CODE (testreg) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13229 testreg = XEXP (testreg, 0);
13231 if (MEM_P (testreg))
13232 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (testreg, 0));
13234 mark_used_regs_combine (SET_SRC (x));
13236 return;
13238 default:
13239 break;
13242 /* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
13245 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13247 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13249 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13250 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (x, i));
13251 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13253 int j;
13255 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13256 mark_used_regs_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
13262 /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN.
13264 Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */
13267 remove_death (unsigned int regno, rtx_insn *insn)
13269 rtx note = find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, regno);
13271 if (note)
13272 remove_note (insn, note);
13274 return note;
13277 /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its
13278 death is in an instruction with luid between FROM_LUID (inclusive) and
13279 TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the
13280 list headed by PNOTES.
13282 That said, don't move registers killed by maybe_kill_insn.
13284 This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These
13285 notes will then be distributed as needed. */
13287 static void
13288 move_deaths (rtx x, rtx maybe_kill_insn, int from_luid, rtx_insn *to_insn,
13289 rtx *pnotes)
13291 const char *fmt;
13292 int len, i;
13293 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13295 if (code == REG)
13297 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13298 rtx_insn *where_dead = reg_stat[regno].last_death;
13300 /* Don't move the register if it gets killed in between from and to. */
13301 if (maybe_kill_insn && reg_set_p (x, maybe_kill_insn)
13302 && ! reg_referenced_p (x, maybe_kill_insn))
13303 return;
13305 if (where_dead
13306 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (where_dead) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn)
13307 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) >= from_luid
13308 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) < DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn))
13310 rtx note = remove_death (regno, where_dead);
13312 /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur
13313 when last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with.
13314 In that case make a new note.
13316 We must also check for the case where X is a hard register
13317 and NOTE is a death note for a range of hard registers
13318 including X. In that case, we must put REG_DEAD notes for
13319 the remaining registers in place of NOTE. */
13321 if (note != 0 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13322 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13323 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
13325 unsigned int deadregno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13326 unsigned int deadend = END_HARD_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13327 unsigned int ourend = END_HARD_REGNO (x);
13328 unsigned int i;
13330 for (i = deadregno; i < deadend; i++)
13331 if (i < regno || i >= ourend)
13332 add_reg_note (where_dead, REG_DEAD, regno_reg_rtx[i]);
13335 /* If we didn't find any note, or if we found a REG_DEAD note that
13336 covers only part of the given reg, and we have a multi-reg hard
13337 register, then to be safe we must check for REG_DEAD notes
13338 for each register other than the first. They could have
13339 their own REG_DEAD notes lying around. */
13340 else if ((note == 0
13341 || (note != 0
13342 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13343 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))
13344 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13345 && hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (x)] > 1)
13347 unsigned int ourend = END_HARD_REGNO (x);
13348 unsigned int i, offset;
13349 rtx oldnotes = 0;
13351 if (note)
13352 offset = hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))];
13353 else
13354 offset = 1;
13356 for (i = regno + offset; i < ourend; i++)
13357 move_deaths (regno_reg_rtx[i],
13358 maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, &oldnotes);
13361 if (note != 0 && GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == GET_MODE (x))
13363 XEXP (note, 1) = *pnotes;
13364 *pnotes = note;
13366 else
13367 *pnotes = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, x, *pnotes);
13370 return;
13373 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
13375 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
13377 move_deaths (SET_SRC (x), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13379 /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG
13380 that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some
13381 piece of everything register in the expression is used by
13382 this insn, so remove any old death. */
13383 /* ??? So why do we test for equality of the sizes? */
13385 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13386 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13387 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
13388 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
13389 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
13390 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)))
13391 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
13393 move_deaths (dest, maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13394 return;
13397 /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire
13398 value, so use that as the destination. */
13399 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
13400 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
13402 /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address.
13403 For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is
13404 being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */
13406 if (MEM_P (dest))
13407 move_deaths (XEXP (dest, 0), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13408 to_insn, pnotes);
13409 return;
13412 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
13413 return;
13415 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
13416 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13418 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
13420 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13422 int j;
13423 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13424 move_deaths (XVECEXP (x, i, j), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13425 to_insn, pnotes);
13427 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13428 move_deaths (XEXP (x, i), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13432 /* Return 1 if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the
13433 pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */
13435 static int
13436 reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx x, rtx body)
13438 int i;
13440 if (GET_CODE (body) == SET)
13442 rtx dest = SET_DEST (body);
13443 rtx target;
13444 unsigned int regno, tregno, endregno, endtregno;
13446 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
13447 target = XEXP (dest, 0);
13448 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13449 target = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
13450 else
13451 return 0;
13453 if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)
13454 target = SUBREG_REG (target);
13456 if (!REG_P (target))
13457 return 0;
13459 tregno = REGNO (target), regno = REGNO (x);
13460 if (tregno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13461 return target == x;
13463 endtregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (target), tregno);
13464 endregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (x), regno);
13466 return endregno > tregno && regno < endtregno;
13469 else if (GET_CODE (body) == PARALLEL)
13470 for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13471 if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i)))
13472 return 1;
13474 return 0;
13477 /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them
13478 as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination
13479 insns including FROM (I2 may be zero).
13481 ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will
13482 not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This
13483 saves searching in the most common cases.
13485 Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending
13486 on the type of note. */
13488 static void
13489 distribute_notes (rtx notes, rtx_insn *from_insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2,
13490 rtx elim_i2, rtx elim_i1, rtx elim_i0)
13492 rtx note, next_note;
13493 rtx tem_note;
13494 rtx_insn *tem_insn;
13496 for (note = notes; note; note = next_note)
13498 rtx_insn *place = 0, *place2 = 0;
13500 next_note = XEXP (note, 1);
13501 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note))
13503 case REG_BR_PROB:
13504 case REG_BR_PRED:
13505 /* Doesn't matter much where we put this, as long as it's somewhere.
13506 It is preferable to keep these notes on branches, which is most
13507 likely to be i3. */
13508 place = i3;
13509 break;
13511 case REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO:
13512 if (JUMP_P (i3))
13513 place = i3;
13514 else
13516 gcc_assert (i2 && JUMP_P (i2));
13517 place = i2;
13519 break;
13521 case REG_EH_REGION:
13522 /* These notes must remain with the call or trapping instruction. */
13523 if (CALL_P (i3))
13524 place = i3;
13525 else if (i2 && CALL_P (i2))
13526 place = i2;
13527 else
13529 gcc_assert (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions);
13530 if (may_trap_p (i3))
13531 place = i3;
13532 else if (i2 && may_trap_p (i2))
13533 place = i2;
13534 /* ??? Otherwise assume we've combined things such that we
13535 can now prove that the instructions can't trap. Drop the
13536 note in this case. */
13538 break;
13540 case REG_ARGS_SIZE:
13541 /* ??? How to distribute between i3-i1. Assume i3 contains the
13542 entire adjustment. Assert i3 contains at least some adjust. */
13543 if (!noop_move_p (i3))
13545 int old_size, args_size = INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0));
13546 /* fixup_args_size_notes looks at REG_NORETURN note,
13547 so ensure the note is placed there first. */
13548 if (CALL_P (i3))
13550 rtx *np;
13551 for (np = &next_note; *np; np = &XEXP (*np, 1))
13552 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (*np) == REG_NORETURN)
13554 rtx n = *np;
13555 *np = XEXP (n, 1);
13556 XEXP (n, 1) = REG_NOTES (i3);
13557 REG_NOTES (i3) = n;
13558 break;
13561 old_size = fixup_args_size_notes (PREV_INSN (i3), i3, args_size);
13562 /* emit_call_1 adds for !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
13563 REG_ARGS_SIZE note to all noreturn calls, allow that here. */
13564 gcc_assert (old_size != args_size
13565 || (CALL_P (i3)
13566 && !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
13567 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NORETURN, NULL_RTX)));
13569 break;
13571 case REG_NORETURN:
13572 case REG_SETJMP:
13573 case REG_TM:
13574 case REG_CALL_DECL:
13575 /* These notes must remain with the call. It should not be
13576 possible for both I2 and I3 to be a call. */
13577 if (CALL_P (i3))
13578 place = i3;
13579 else
13581 gcc_assert (i2 && CALL_P (i2));
13582 place = i2;
13584 break;
13586 case REG_UNUSED:
13587 /* Any clobbers for i3 may still exist, and so we must process
13588 REG_UNUSED notes from that insn.
13590 Any clobbers from i2 or i1 can only exist if they were added by
13591 recog_for_combine. In that case, recog_for_combine created the
13592 necessary REG_UNUSED notes. Trying to keep any original
13593 REG_UNUSED notes from these insns can cause incorrect output
13594 if it is for the same register as the original i3 dest.
13595 In that case, we will notice that the register is set in i3,
13596 and then add a REG_UNUSED note for the destination of i3, which
13597 is wrong. However, it is possible to have REG_UNUSED notes from
13598 i2 or i1 for register which were both used and clobbered, so
13599 we keep notes from i2 or i1 if they will turn into REG_DEAD
13600 notes. */
13602 /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there
13603 unless there is one already. */
13604 if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13606 if (from_insn != i3)
13607 break;
13609 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
13610 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
13611 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, XEXP (note, 0))))
13612 place = i3;
13614 /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register
13615 now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there
13616 is one already. */
13617 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
13618 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
13619 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_DEAD,
13620 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
13621 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, XEXP (note, 0))))
13623 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_DEAD);
13624 place = i3;
13626 break;
13628 case REG_EQUAL:
13629 case REG_EQUIV:
13630 case REG_NOALIAS:
13631 /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can
13632 only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they
13633 remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored.
13635 If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we
13636 must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the
13637 equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do
13638 slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST
13639 or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't
13640 seem worth the trouble. */
13642 if (from_insn == i3
13643 && (XEXP (note, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note, 0))))
13644 place = i3;
13645 break;
13647 case REG_INC:
13648 /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must
13649 be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */
13650 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13651 place = i3;
13653 if (i2 && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13655 if (place)
13656 place2 = i2;
13657 else
13658 place = i2;
13660 break;
13662 case REG_LABEL_TARGET:
13663 case REG_LABEL_OPERAND:
13664 /* This can show up in several ways -- either directly in the
13665 pattern, or hidden off in the constant pool with (or without?)
13666 a REG_EQUAL note. */
13667 /* ??? Ignore the without-reg_equal-note problem for now. */
13668 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
13669 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i3, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
13670 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
13671 && LABEL_REF_LABEL (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13672 place = i3;
13674 if (i2
13675 && (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))
13676 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i2, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
13677 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
13678 && LABEL_REF_LABEL (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0))))
13680 if (place)
13681 place2 = i2;
13682 else
13683 place = i2;
13686 /* For REG_LABEL_TARGET on a JUMP_P, we prefer to put the note
13687 as a JUMP_LABEL or decrement LABEL_NUSES if it's already
13688 there. */
13689 if (place && JUMP_P (place)
13690 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
13691 && (JUMP_LABEL (place) == NULL
13692 || JUMP_LABEL (place) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13694 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place);
13696 if (!label)
13697 JUMP_LABEL (place) = XEXP (note, 0);
13698 else if (LABEL_P (label))
13699 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
13702 if (place2 && JUMP_P (place2)
13703 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
13704 && (JUMP_LABEL (place2) == NULL
13705 || JUMP_LABEL (place2) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13707 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place2);
13709 if (!label)
13710 JUMP_LABEL (place2) = XEXP (note, 0);
13711 else if (LABEL_P (label))
13712 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
13713 place2 = 0;
13715 break;
13717 case REG_NONNEG:
13718 /* This note says something about the value of a register prior
13719 to the execution of an insn. It is too much trouble to see
13720 if the note is still correct in all situations. It is better
13721 to simply delete it. */
13722 break;
13724 case REG_DEAD:
13725 /* If we replaced the right hand side of FROM_INSN with a
13726 REG_EQUAL note, the original use of the dying register
13727 will not have been combined into I3 and I2. In such cases,
13728 FROM_INSN is guaranteed to be the first of the combined
13729 instructions, so we simply need to search back before
13730 FROM_INSN for the previous use or set of this register,
13731 then alter the notes there appropriately.
13733 If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there.
13734 Similarly for I2, if it is nonzero and adjacent to I3.
13736 If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2
13737 and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate,
13738 there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2
13739 or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register
13740 from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where
13741 we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will
13742 eliminate the reference to A.
13744 In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous
13745 use of A and put the death note there. */
13747 if (from_insn
13748 && from_insn == i2mod
13749 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), i2mod_new_rhs))
13750 tem_insn = from_insn;
13751 else
13753 if (from_insn
13754 && CALL_P (from_insn)
13755 && find_reg_fusage (from_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0)))
13756 place = from_insn;
13757 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13758 place = i3;
13759 else if (i2 != 0 && next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
13760 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13761 place = i2;
13762 else if ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i2)
13763 && !(i2mod
13764 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0),
13765 i2mod_old_rhs)))
13766 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i1)
13767 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i0))
13768 break;
13769 tem_insn = i3;
13770 /* If the new I2 sets the same register that is marked dead
13771 in the note, the note now should not be put on I2, as the
13772 note refers to a previous incarnation of the reg. */
13773 if (i2 != 0 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13774 tem_insn = i2;
13777 if (place == 0)
13779 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
13781 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn); place == 0; tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
13783 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
13785 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
13786 break;
13787 continue;
13790 /* If the register is being set at TEM_INSN, see if that is all
13791 TEM_INSN is doing. If so, delete TEM_INSN. Otherwise, make this
13792 into a REG_UNUSED note instead. Don't delete sets to
13793 global register vars. */
13794 if ((REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13795 || !global_regs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))])
13796 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn)))
13798 rtx set = single_set (tem_insn);
13799 rtx inner_dest = 0;
13800 rtx_insn *cc0_setter = NULL;
13802 if (set != 0)
13803 for (inner_dest = SET_DEST (set);
13804 (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13805 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
13806 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT);
13807 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0))
13810 /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that
13811 modified the register.
13813 CC0 targets must be careful to maintain setter/user
13814 pairs. If we cannot delete the setter due to side
13815 effects, mark the user with an UNUSED note instead
13816 of deleting it. */
13818 if (set != 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
13819 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), inner_dest)
13820 #if HAVE_cc0
13821 && (! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (set))
13822 || ((cc0_setter = prev_cc0_setter (tem_insn)) != NULL
13823 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (cc0_setter)) > 0))
13824 #endif
13827 /* Move the notes and links of TEM_INSN elsewhere.
13828 This might delete other dead insns recursively.
13829 First set the pattern to something that won't use
13830 any register. */
13831 rtx old_notes = REG_NOTES (tem_insn);
13833 PATTERN (tem_insn) = pc_rtx;
13834 REG_NOTES (tem_insn) = NULL;
13836 distribute_notes (old_notes, tem_insn, tem_insn, NULL,
13837 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
13838 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem_insn));
13840 SET_INSN_DELETED (tem_insn);
13841 if (tem_insn == i2)
13842 i2 = NULL;
13844 /* Delete the setter too. */
13845 if (cc0_setter)
13847 PATTERN (cc0_setter) = pc_rtx;
13848 old_notes = REG_NOTES (cc0_setter);
13849 REG_NOTES (cc0_setter) = NULL;
13851 distribute_notes (old_notes, cc0_setter,
13852 cc0_setter, NULL,
13853 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
13854 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (cc0_setter));
13856 SET_INSN_DELETED (cc0_setter);
13857 if (cc0_setter == i2)
13858 i2 = NULL;
13861 else
13863 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_UNUSED);
13865 /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one
13866 here. Do not place a REG_DEAD note, even if
13867 the register is also used here; that would not
13868 match the algorithm used in lifetime analysis
13869 and can cause the consistency check in the
13870 scheduler to fail. */
13871 if (! find_regno_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED,
13872 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))))
13873 place = tem_insn;
13874 break;
13877 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn))
13878 || (CALL_P (tem_insn)
13879 && find_reg_fusage (tem_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0))))
13881 place = tem_insn;
13883 /* If we are doing a 3->2 combination, and we have a
13884 register which formerly died in i3 and was not used
13885 by i2, which now no longer dies in i3 and is used in
13886 i2 but does not die in i2, and place is between i2
13887 and i3, then we may need to move a link from place to
13888 i2. */
13889 if (i2 && DF_INSN_LUID (place) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
13890 && from_insn
13891 && DF_INSN_LUID (from_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
13892 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13894 struct insn_link *links = LOG_LINKS (place);
13895 LOG_LINKS (place) = NULL;
13896 distribute_links (links);
13898 break;
13901 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
13902 break;
13907 /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do
13908 anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note.
13909 We check here if it is set at all, not if is it totally replaced,
13910 which is what `dead_or_set_p' checks, so also check for it being
13911 set partially. */
13913 if (place && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD)
13915 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13916 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13918 if (dead_or_set_p (place, XEXP (note, 0))
13919 || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (place)))
13921 /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear
13922 last_death. [I no longer understand why this is
13923 being done.] */
13924 if (rsp->last_death != place)
13925 rsp->last_death = 0;
13926 place = 0;
13928 else
13929 rsp->last_death = place;
13931 /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying
13932 multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all
13933 parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object
13934 that is unused, we must arrange for an appropriate REG_DEAD
13935 note to be added for it. However, we can't just emit a USE
13936 and tag the note to it, since the register might actually
13937 be dead; so we recourse, and the recursive call then finds
13938 the previous insn that used this register. */
13940 if (place && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13941 && hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))] > 1)
13943 unsigned int endregno = END_HARD_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13944 bool all_used = true;
13945 unsigned int i;
13947 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
13948 if ((! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
13949 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
13950 || dead_or_set_regno_p (place, i))
13952 all_used = false;
13953 break;
13956 if (! all_used)
13958 /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are
13959 not already dead or set. */
13961 for (i = regno; i < endregno;
13962 i += hard_regno_nregs[i][reg_raw_mode[i]])
13964 rtx piece = regno_reg_rtx[i];
13965 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
13967 if (! dead_or_set_p (place, piece)
13968 && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
13969 PATTERN (place)))
13971 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, piece,
13972 NULL_RTX);
13974 distribute_notes (new_note, place, place,
13975 NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
13976 NULL_RTX);
13978 else if (! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
13979 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
13980 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (place); ;
13981 tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
13983 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
13985 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
13986 break;
13987 continue;
13989 if (dead_or_set_p (tem_insn, piece)
13990 || reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
13991 PATTERN (tem_insn)))
13993 add_reg_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED, piece);
13994 break;
13999 place = 0;
14003 break;
14005 default:
14006 /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the
14007 compilation. */
14008 gcc_unreachable ();
14011 if (place)
14013 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (place);
14014 REG_NOTES (place) = note;
14017 if (place2)
14018 add_shallow_copy_of_reg_note (place2, note);
14022 /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on
14023 I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called to add a link
14024 pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */
14026 static void
14027 distribute_links (struct insn_link *links)
14029 struct insn_link *link, *next_link;
14031 for (link = links; link; link = next_link)
14033 rtx_insn *place = 0;
14034 rtx_insn *insn;
14035 rtx set, reg;
14037 next_link = link->next;
14039 /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE, ignore it. */
14040 if (NOTE_P (link->insn))
14041 continue;
14043 set = 0;
14044 rtx pat = PATTERN (link->insn);
14045 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
14046 set = pat;
14047 else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
14049 int i;
14050 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
14052 set = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
14053 if (GET_CODE (set) != SET)
14054 continue;
14056 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14057 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14058 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14059 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14060 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14062 if (!REG_P (reg))
14063 continue;
14065 if (REGNO (reg) == link->regno)
14066 break;
14068 if (i == XVECLEN (pat, 0))
14069 continue;
14071 else
14072 continue;
14074 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14076 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14077 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14078 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14079 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14081 /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses
14082 a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start
14083 searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop
14084 when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block.
14086 Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from
14087 I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here
14088 since most links don't point very far away. */
14090 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (link->insn);
14091 (insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
14092 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb) != insn));
14093 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
14094 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
14095 continue;
14096 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14098 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14099 place = insn;
14100 break;
14102 else if (CALL_P (insn)
14103 && find_reg_fusage (insn, USE, reg))
14105 place = insn;
14106 break;
14108 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_set_p (reg, insn))
14109 break;
14111 /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there
14112 is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */
14114 if (place)
14116 struct insn_link *link2;
14118 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link2, place)
14119 if (link2->insn == link->insn && link2->regno == link->regno)
14120 break;
14122 if (link2 == NULL)
14124 link->next = LOG_LINKS (place);
14125 LOG_LINKS (place) = link;
14127 /* Set added_links_insn to the earliest insn we added a
14128 link to. */
14129 if (added_links_insn == 0
14130 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (place))
14131 added_links_insn = place;
14137 /* Check for any register or memory mentioned in EQUIV that is not
14138 mentioned in EXPR. This is used to restrict EQUIV to "specializations"
14139 of EXPR where some registers may have been replaced by constants. */
14141 static bool
14142 unmentioned_reg_p (rtx equiv, rtx expr)
14144 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
14145 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, equiv, NONCONST)
14147 const_rtx x = *iter;
14148 if ((REG_P (x) || MEM_P (x))
14149 && !reg_mentioned_p (x, expr))
14150 return true;
14152 return false;
14155 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
14156 dump_combine_stats (FILE *file)
14158 fprintf
14159 (file,
14160 ";; Combiner statistics: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n\n",
14161 combine_attempts, combine_merges, combine_extras, combine_successes);
14164 void
14165 dump_combine_total_stats (FILE *file)
14167 fprintf
14168 (file,
14169 "\n;; Combiner totals: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n",
14170 total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes);
14173 /* Try combining insns through substitution. */
14174 static unsigned int
14175 rest_of_handle_combine (void)
14177 int rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine;
14179 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE + DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
14180 df_note_add_problem ();
14181 df_analyze ();
14183 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs ();
14184 reg_n_sets_max = max_reg_num ();
14186 rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
14187 = combine_instructions (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
14189 /* Combining insns may have turned an indirect jump into a
14190 direct jump. Rebuild the JUMP_LABEL fields of jumping
14191 instructions. */
14192 if (rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine)
14194 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
14195 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
14196 cleanup_cfg (0);
14197 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
14200 regstat_free_n_sets_and_refs ();
14201 return 0;
14204 namespace {
14206 const pass_data pass_data_combine =
14208 RTL_PASS, /* type */
14209 "combine", /* name */
14210 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
14211 TV_COMBINE, /* tv_id */
14212 PROP_cfglayout, /* properties_required */
14213 0, /* properties_provided */
14214 0, /* properties_destroyed */
14215 0, /* todo_flags_start */
14216 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
14219 class pass_combine : public rtl_opt_pass
14221 public:
14222 pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14223 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_combine, ctxt)
14226 /* opt_pass methods: */
14227 virtual bool gate (function *) { return (optimize > 0); }
14228 virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
14230 return rest_of_handle_combine ();
14233 }; // class pass_combine
14235 } // anon namespace
14237 rtl_opt_pass *
14238 make_pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14240 return new pass_combine (ctxt);